diff --git a/.openpublishing.redirection.json b/.openpublishing.redirection.json index 924850fbf..3f1c820fa 100644 --- a/.openpublishing.redirection.json +++ b/.openpublishing.redirection.json @@ -701,6 +701,11 @@ "source_path": "business-central/admin-how-to-create-custom-company-configuration-packages.md", "redirect_url": "/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/set-up-standard-company-configuration-packages", "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "business-central/across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md", + "redirect_url": "/dynamics365/business-central/admin-sandbox-environments", + "redirect_document_id": false } ] diff --git a/business-central/.vscode/settings.json b/business-central/.vscode/settings.json new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9cbf71b15 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/.vscode/settings.json @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +{ + "explorer.openEditors.sortOrder": "alphabetical" +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-advance-payments-localization-cz.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-advance-payments-localization-cz.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53c4afc9b --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-advance-payments-localization-cz.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +--- +title: Advance Payments Localization for Czech (Extension) +description: This section describes Advance Payments Localization for Czech extension functionality. +author: v-pejano + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: article +ms.search.keywords: Czech, Finance, Localization +ms.date: 09/01/2021 +ms.reviewer: v-pejano +ms.author: v-pejano +--- + +# Advance Payments Localization for Czech (Extension) + +The **Advance Payments** extension is used in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](../../includes/prod_short.md)] to create invoices and make payments before goods or services are delivered. The Advance Payments solution helps companies meet regulatory requirements for registration and posting Advanced Payments (Prepayments) include VAT requirements in the Czech Republic. + +The Advance Payments functionality allows you to receive Advance Invoices from suppliers, issue Advance Invoices to customers, make Advance Payments including payments subject to VAT and drawdown Advance Payments on receipts. It also provides tax documents required by legislation, outputs for financial statements and VAT reports. + +**The module includes:** + +- Sales and Purchase Advance Invoices +- Advance Payments received and issued +- Tax Documents and Tax Credit Notes for Advance Payments received or issued + +**Main functions of the module:** + +- Creation of Sales or Purchase Advance Invoices according to the settings of Advance Payment Templates +- Create advances from Sales Orders based on a percentage or amount entered +- Proposing advances into a Payment Order and, on the other side, payment of advances by the bank +- Connection to the Cash Desk module for the possibility of paying advances by cash +- Issue and print Advance Tax Documents for Advance Payments automatically or manually +- Managing the use of paid advances by the final invoice +- The ability to close unused advances including a tax settlement +- Working with foreign currency, exchange rate differences between Advance Payment and Invoice +- Possibility to unassign payment to Advance Invoice or additional linking +- Option to unlink final invoice to Advance Payment or additional linking +- Reports for recapitulation of payments and drawdown of advances, reports for recapitulation of VAT on advances + +## See Also + +[Czech Local Functionality](czech-local-functionality.md) +[Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-banking-documents-localization-cz.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-banking-documents-localization-cz.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20c703568 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-banking-documents-localization-cz.md @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +--- +title: Banking Documents Localization for Czech (Extension) +description: This section describes Banking Documents Localization for Czech extension functionality. +author: v-pejano + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: article +ms.search.keywords: Czech, Finance, Banking, Localization +ms.date: 09/01/2021 +ms.reviewer: v-pejano +ms.author: v-pejano +--- + +# Banking Documents Localization for Czech (Extension) + +Provides functionality for Banking Documents in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](../../includes/prod_short.md)] for the Czech Republic. +**Banking Documents** app allows you to create **Payment Orders** and **Bank Statements** documents in a form that respects local practices. You can use an unlimited number of bank accounts of various banking institutions and in different currencies. You can import and export bank files from/to the banking software. +This feature provides improved efficiency and prevents users from making mistakes when entering the customer and vendor bank account data by capturing the bank specific information and eliminating the need to re-enter it every time. + +**The extension provides the following key features:** + +- Create, issue and export a payment order +- Create, import, and issue a bank statement +- Bank statement rollover into a payment journal +- Pairing entries in the payment journal and posting + +## See Also + +[Czech Local Functionality](czech-local-functionality.md) +[Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md index 260ed4ec6..11c55187c 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md @@ -47,9 +47,10 @@ If you do not close your fiscal year or do not run the **Close Year** action bef When you create the report, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](../../includes/prod_short.md)] sorts the information in the report by the **No.** and **Creation Date** fields in the general ledger register. -The report will have the following name: FEC +The report will have the following name: `FEC` + +## See Also -## See Also [Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-digital-audits.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-digital-audits.md index dea19ae29..2fdc6c57d 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-digital-audits.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-digital-audits.md @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ You must set up data export record sources to be able to export data for a digit ## To set up a data export -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Data Exports**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Data Exports**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **New** action. 3. On the **Data Exports** page, fill in the fields as described in the following table. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Next, you must specify the source for the data that will be exported. |**Period Field No.**|Specify a filter for which date field will be used in setting the start date and end date of the report.

For example, if you select the **G/L Entry** table as your data export source, you can select one of the date fields that are available in that table.| |**Table Filter**|Specify a field on which you want to set a filter.

On the **Table Filter** page, enter filter settings in the **Field Filter** column.

For example, you can specify a field that conveys information about the amount. You can also specify a date field and set a filter for it if you want to filter on a time period other than Start Date .. End Date. However, you cannot specify a date field and set a filter for it if the same field is already used in the Period Field No.| |**Date Filter Field No.**|Specify a date filter field if the table has one.

If the table has more than one date filter, do not specify one in this field.| - |**Date Filter Handing**|Specify how the date filter is to be handled:

- : No filter is set.

- Period: Use the specified Start Date and End Date.

- End Date Only: Use the batch job's End Date.

- Start Date Only: Use the batch job's Start Date - 1.| + |**Date Filter Handing**|Specify how the date filter is to be handled:

- \: No filter is set.

- Period: Use the specified Start Date and End Date.

- End Date Only: Use the batch job's End Date.

- Start Date Only: Use the batch job's Start Date - 1.| |**Export File Name**|Specify the name of the file that data from this table will be exported to.

For example, if the table is the **G/L Account** table, the value of the **Export Table Name** can be **GLAccount**, and the value of the **Export File Name** field can be **GLAccount.txt**.| |**Key No.**|Optional. Specify the key field.| diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Posting-No-series-setup.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Posting-No-series-setup.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50673a723 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Posting-No-series-setup.md @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +--- + title: Setting up Posting No. Series + description: Specifies Posting No. series required + + author: v-debapd + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: article + ms.devlang: na + ms.tgt_pltfrm: na + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: India, local, IN, English + ms.date: 09/20/2021 + ms.author: v-debapd + +--- +# Setting up Posting No. Series + +[!INCLUDE[vnext_preview](../../includes/vnext_preview.md)] + +## Overview + +Business Central has included Posting No. Series feature to Indian Localization. + +Posting No. series functionality enables you to maintain the different number series of below sales, purchase, and transfer orders for different locations. + +- Purchase Receipt + +- Purchase Invoice + +- Sales Shipment + +- Sales Invoice + +- Purchase Credit Memo + +- Sales Return Receipt + +- Sales Credit Memo + +- Purchase Return Shipment + +- Transfer Shipment + +- Transfer Receipt + +- GST Distribution + +- Service Transfer Shipment + +- Service Transfer Receipt + +- Gate Entry + +Following comprehensive functionalities are covered under Posting No. Series: + + - Provision to define different number series for different types of sales and purchase documents for different Locations. + - After posting of sales and purchase documents, the program will store the number series assigned in Posting No. Series page for specified filters. + - Provision to define separate number series in sales and purchase documents in case of trading activity. + - Provision to define separate number series for the locations used in transfer orders. + + +## Setting up Posting No. Series +You need to create a set up for posting of documents. The following procedure shows how to set up posting number series. +1. Choose the icon, enter Posting No. Series, and then choose the related link. +2. Click on New +3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |-----|:----------| + |**Document Type**|Specify the number series for Purchase, Sales & Transfer documents. | + |**Condition**|Specifies the filters for type of record selected in the Document Type. For example, if Document Type is Posted Sales Invoice and Condition is Location Code as BLUE, then system will update the document number of posted sales invoices for BLUE location with code specified in the Posting No. series field. | + |**Posting No. Series**| Specifies the desired number series for each document type and defined filters. + +> [!Note] +> +> Program will record the number series for posted documents based on number specified in the above Posting No. Series field. + + diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Stale-Check.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Stale-Check.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7aa5ff29e --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Stale-Check.md @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +--- + title: Setting up and how to stale check + description: Specifies Basic Setups and Process of how to stale check + + author: v-debapd + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: article + ms.devlang: na + ms.tgt_pltfrm: na + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: India, local, IN, English + ms.date: 04/19/2021 + ms.author: v-debapd + +--- +# Setting Up Stale Check + + +Business Central has included Stale Check Feature as part of Indian Localization. + +A check is considered to be stale after it has expired. Each bank has a specific period during which checks are considered to be valid. This period usually lasts 3 months. If a check is not presented for payment within the specified period, it is considered to be stale. + +## Stale check setup + +Below is the list of setups, that are required to be configured. + +- [General Ledger Setup](stale-check.md#to-set-up-general-ledger-setup) +- [Bank Account](stale-check.md#to-set-up-bank-account) + + +### To set up general ledger setup + +Following needs to be configured in General Ledger Setup for stale check. + +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. +2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Activate Cheque No.**|If it is True, Document No will not be replaced by Cheque No while using Computer or Manual Cheque option. Cheque No & Cheque date will flow in Bank ledger Entry in case of Bank Receipt, Bank Payment and Contra Voucher. Cheque No. and Cheque Date will also flow in Check Ledger Entry in case of Manual or Computer Cheque is used. If it is False, Document No. filed will be replaced with check number.| + +### To set up bank account + +Following configuration is needed. + +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Account**, and then choose the related link. +2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Stale Cheque Stipulated Period**|Specifies the period for cheque stale date calculation, Cheque Stale Date = (Check Date + Stale Cheque Stipulated Period).| + + +## How to: manage stale cheque + +Following is the process of managing stale cheque. + +1. Create and post bank payment from **General Journal**, **Payment Journal** or **Bank Payment Voucher**. +2. **Cheque No.** and **Cheque Date** should have a value in the payment journal. +3. System will calculate the **Stale Cheque Expiry Date** and populate the same in **Bank Ledger Entry** and **Check Ledger Entry**. +4. To mark the check as stale go to the relevant **Bank Account**, choose the **Edit** action, and then choose the **Check Ledger Entries** action. +5. In the **Check Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Stale Check** action. +6. Select the **Stale Check Only** check box. +7. Choose the **OK** button. +8. Cheque can also be staled from **Bank Ledger Entry**. In the **Bank Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Stale Check** action. +9. Select the **Stale Check Only** check box. +10. Choose the **OK** button. + + +> [!NOTE] +> Make sure that your work date should be later than Stale cheque expiry date. + + + + + +## See Also +[GST Overview](GST-001-Basic-Setup.md) + + + + + + + + + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](../../includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-001-Basic-Setup.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-001-Basic-Setup.md index 27f28c3ce..c6d38f9fd 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-001-Basic-Setup.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-001-Basic-Setup.md @@ -48,6 +48,7 @@ Following setups are required for Subcontracting: - [General Ledger Setup](subcontracting-001-basic-setup.md#setting-up-general-ledger-setup) - [Work Center](subcontracting-001-basic-setup.md#setting-up-work-center) - [Routing](subcontracting-001-basic-setup.md#setting-up-routing) +- [GST liability no series setup](subcontracting-001-basic-setup.md#gst-liability-no-series-setup) ## Subcontracting location setup @@ -116,8 +117,12 @@ You need to create a Routing for finished item. Routing defines the sequence of 3. On the Lines tab, enter the job work charges in the **Unit Cost Per** field. +## GST liability no series setup +No. series for GST liability invoice is setup on location master. You can define location wise number series for GST liability invoices. +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report.](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Tax Information** FastTab, select **No. series code** in the **GST Liabilty Invoice** field. ## See Also [Subcontracting Transactions](Subcontracting-Transactions.md) diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Overview.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Overview.md index 718a8dc70..2623e4626 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Overview.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Overview.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting up Tax Collected at Source, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 - description: Specifies Basic Setups required, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 + description: Specifies the basic setups required, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961. author: v-debapd diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..22a507f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +--- + title: Setting Up Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) on purchase of goods under Section 194Q + description: Specifies the setups required, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961. + + author: v-debapd + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: article + ms.devlang: na + ms.tgt_pltfrm: na + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: India, local, IN, English + ms.date: 06/25/2021 + ms.author: v-debapd + +--- +# Setting Up Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) on purchase of goods under Section 194Q + + +[!INCLUDE[vnext_preview](../../includes/vnext_preview.md)] + +Business Central has included Tax Collected at Source (TCS) Feature in Indian Localization. + +A new TDS section 194Q, on purchase of goods is recently introduced vide the Finance Act, 2021. + +This is going to apply to any person, being a buyer responsible for making a payment to a resident for purchase of goods when value or aggregate of purchase from a supplier or payment whichever is earlier, Rs.50 lacs during the previous year. The transaction with any supplier with the addition of which your aggregate purchase/payment for a purchase from that supplier exceeds Rs.50 lacs, will be the transaction effective which TDS must be deducted @0.10% of the Purchase transaction or payment thereof whichever is earlier. +This new Section 194Q is applicable from 1st July 2021. + + +## Setting Up TDS section 194Q + +### Following is the list of setups that will be required + +- [TDS Rates](TDS-194Q-section-overview.md#to-set-up-tds-rates) +- [TDS 194Q Opening](TDS-194Q-section-overview.md#tds-194q-opening) + + +## To set up TDS rates + +The rate of TDS is defined by the combination of the TDS section and assessee code. The rates of tax deduction may vary for a given period. A new field 'Calc. Over & Above Threshold' has been added on the setup. + + +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **TDS Section**, and then choose the related link. +2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Calc. Over & Above Threshold**|This field is created in TDS Setup table, by selecting this field, system will calculate TDS on amount that is over & above threshold. If this field is not selected in TDS Setup, system will calculate TDS normally, i.e., system will calculate TDS on amount exceeding the specified threshold amount. If user selects Threshold Overlook field on NOD/NOC Lines, then, system calculates TDS normally, i.e., calculate TDS from INR 1 onwards without considering threshold amount. This field can be selected for any TDS group, as its application is not limited to TDS, under Section 194Q.| + + +## TDS 194Q Opening + +A provision has been made to upload the opening amount, if any, under TDS section 194Q. System only updates the amount in TDS Entries table for threshold calculation purposes. This amount is not posted into G/L. + +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **TDS 194Q Opening**, and then choose the related link. +2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Vendor No.**|Specifies the vendor number for which 194Q opening is to be posted.| + |**Assessee Code**|Specifies the assessee code.| + |**TDS Section**|Specify the TDS Section, for which opening entry is to be posted.| + |**Document No.**|Specifies the document number, that will appear on the TDS ledger entries.| + |**Posting Date**|Specify the date, on which the TDS ledger entries are to be posted.| + |**Purchase Amount**|Specify the purchase amount, that must be posted into TDS Entry table as vendor’s opening entry for Section 194Q.| + |**TDS Threshold Amount**|Specifies the TDS threshold amount, that is defined on the TDS setup for TDS Nature of Deduction.| + |**Description**|Specifies the description of the transaction, to be posted.| + + +## To setup Customer + +Provision is made available on customer master to capture whether aggregate turnover of customer in the immediate previous year was below 10 crores or above 10 crores. + +1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](image/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer**, and then choose the related link. +2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Aggregate Turnover**|This field can be used to define aggregate Turnover in the immediate previous year exceeds Rs.10 crore to an assessee. The available options are: Less than 10 Crore, More than 10 Crore.| + + +## See Also +[TDS 194Q Transactions](TDS-194Q-Transactions.md) + + + + diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Transactions.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Transactions.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b96ce91e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Transactions.md @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +--- + title: TDS calculation and transactions as per Section 194Q + description: TDS calculation and transactions as per Section 194Q. + + author: v-debapd + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: article + ms.devlang: na + ms.tgt_pltfrm: na + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: India, local, IN, English + ms.date: 06/25/2021 + ms.author: v-debapd + +--- +# TDS calculation and transactions as per Section 194Q + +[!INCLUDE[vnext_preview](../../includes/vnext_preview.md)] + +As per new TDS rules, TDS to be deducted to any person, being a buyer responsible for making a payment to a resident for purchase of goods when value or aggregate of purchase from a supplier or payment whichever is earlier, Rs.50 lacs during the previous year. + + As per this section, any purchase invoices/payments that is over and above the threshold amount (50,00,000). TDS amount to be deducted on amount exceeding threshold limit. For Example, Buyer buys goods from Seller amounting to INR. 85 lakhs and is liable to deduct TDS under section 194 Q. In this case TDS to be deducted on INR. 35 lakhs (85-50) @ 0.1%. + +Provision (Calc. Over & Above Threshold) has been provided for user on TDS Rates to calculate TDS on amount that is over & above threshold. + + +The existing TDS calculation logic in system will work for invoice and advance payment normally, below are the functions for example: + - TDS Calc. Over & Above Threshold + - Normal TDS Calculation + - TDS Calculation on Advance Payment + +## TDS to be calculated on vendor invoice (through purchase invoice or purchase order). + +In the given scenario, vendor has issued an invoice for INR 55,00,000, on which 0.10% TDS is applicable under TDS Section 194Q. Initial threshold achieved value or opening balance under section 194Q, is INR 20,00,000. + + - In this case TDS calculation will be as following: + + |Component|Value| + |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Initial threshold achieved value/ Opening Balance**|20,00,000| + |**1st Transaction, on or after 1st July 21**|2000000 – No TDS| + |**2nd Transaction, on or after 1st July 21**|1500000 – TDS Calculated| + |**TDS Base Amount**|500000 (Total cumulative value 5500000 -5000000)| + |**TDS Amount**|500 (500000*0.10%)| + + - On posting purchase invoice of second transaction, GL entries will be as following: + + |Particulars|Amount| + |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Expense Account**|1500000| + |**Vendor Account**|-1499500| + |**TDS Payable Account**|-500| + +## TDS to be calculated on vendor advance payment (through general or payment journal). + +In the given scenario, two advance payments must made to vendor for INR 20,00,000 and 15,00,000 respectively, on which 0.10% TDS is applicable under TDS Section 194Q. Initial threshold achieved value or opening balance under section 194Q is INR 20,00,000. + +- In this case TDS calculation will be as following: + + | Component | Value | + |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Initial threshold achieved value/ Opening Balance**|2000000| + |**1st Transaction, on or after 1st July 21**|2000000 – No TDS| + |**2nd Transaction, on or after 1st July 21**|1500000 – TDS Calculated| + |**TDS Base Amount**|500000 (Total cumulative value 5500000 -5000000)| + |**TDS Amount**|500 (500000*0.10%)| + +- On posting purchase invoice of second transaction, GL entries will be as following: + + | Particulars | Amount | + |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| + |**Vendor Account**|1500000| + |**Bank Account**|-1499500| + |**TDS Payable Account**|-500| + + +## See Also +[TDS 194Q Overview](TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md) + + + + + + diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-Overview.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-Overview.md index d98eca51a..e5a836d19 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-Overview.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-Overview.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting up Tax Deducted at Source, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 - description: Specifies Basic Setups required, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 + description: Describes the basic setups that are required by the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961. author: v-debapd diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-for-Customer-Overview.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-for-Customer-Overview.md index e8043d1a3..d5890278c 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-for-Customer-Overview.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-for-Customer-Overview.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting up Tax Deducted at Source by Customer, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 - description: Specifies Basic Setups required, as per the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 + description: Describes the basic setups required according to the Income Tax Act, 1961. author: v-debapd diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/BCOnPrem.png b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/BCOnPrem.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e930cbc0 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/BCOnPrem.png differ diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/codeupgrade.png b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/codeupgrade.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01f93098d Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/image/codeupgrade.png differ diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/india-local-functionality.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/india-local-functionality.md index 019493149..f53418510 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/india-local-functionality.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/India/india-local-functionality.md @@ -86,6 +86,8 @@ The following topics describe the local functionality in the Indian version of [ * [TDS Provisional Entry](TDS-Provisional-Entries.md) **Available Now** * [TDS Adjustment Entry](TDS-Adjustment-Entries.md) **Available Now** * [TDS Payment to Authority](TDS-TDS-Payment-to-Authority.md) **Available Now** + * [TDS 194Q Section Overview](TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md) **Available Now** + * [TDS 194Q Transactions](TDS-194Q-Transactions.md) **Available Now** * TDS for Customer * [TDS for Customer Overview](TDS-for-Customer-Overview.md) **Available Now** @@ -121,10 +123,12 @@ The following topics describe the local functionality in the Indian version of [ * [Create GST Liability](Subcontracting-Create-GST-Liability.md) **Available Now** * [Subcontracting Report](Subcontracting-Reports.md) **Available Now** -* Stale Cheque **Comming Soon** - - + +* Stale Cheque + * [Stale Cheque](Stale-Check.md) **Available Now** +* Upgrade from an India Version of Dynamics NAV 2016 to the Latest Version of Business Central + * [Business Central IN Data Migration Toolkit](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/upgrade/india-data-migration-toolkit-overview) **Available Now** ## See Also diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md index 8d8c2a77c..d35043bda 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ By default these three fields will be populated with values taken from the vendo When the invoice is finished it can be posted. ### Example -When creating a purchase invoice for Olek Johansson we enter **OLEK** in the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field. By default the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be populated with values taken from the Olek Johansson's vendor card. Therefore, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be ****, **ABN** and **OJBA** respectively. Nevertheless, these values can be changed. +When creating a purchase invoice for Olek Johansson we enter **OLEK** in the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field. By default the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be populated with values taken from the Olek Johansson's vendor card. Therefore, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be **\**, **ABN** and **OJBA** respectively. Nevertheless, these values can be changed. ## Create Proposal Open the **Telebank - Bank Overview** page and browse to the bank through which we want to perform our payment. Open the **Proposal** page and generate payment proposals using the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job. diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md index 230240e2d..f1a00d3c2 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md @@ -1,9 +1,6 @@ --- - title: How to Set Up Bank CCC Codes + title: Set Up Bank CCC Codes [ES] description: Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique account code used by banks to identify their customers. The CCC code is printed on bank documents such as checks and statements. - - services: project-madeira - documentationcenter: '' author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -16,8 +13,9 @@ ms.author: edupont --- -# Set Up Bank CCC Codes -Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique account code used by banks to identify their customers. The CCC code is printed on bank documents such as checks and statements. +# Set Up Bank CCC Codes in the Spanish Version + +Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique account code used by Spanish banks to identify their customers. The CCC code is printed on bank documents such as checks and statements. You can set up CCC codes in the following locations: @@ -30,11 +28,11 @@ The following procedure describes how to set up bank CCC codes for your company. ## To enter CCC codes -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------| + |Field |Position |Description | + |----------------|---------|---------------------------------------| |**CCC Bank No.**|1-4|Identifies the bank where the account has been opened.| |**CCC Bank Branch No.**|5-8|Identifies the branch code. If the bank does not use this reference, the branch code can be zeros.| |**CCC Control Digits**|9-10|Identifies the control digits.| @@ -44,15 +42,16 @@ The following procedure describes how to set up bank CCC codes for existing cust ## To set up bank CCC codes for a customer bank account -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customer Bank Account Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Transfer** FastTab, enter information into the relevant CCC fields. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customer Bank Account Card**, and then choose the related link. +2 On the **Transfer** FastTab, enter information into the relevant CCC fields. > [!NOTE] > You must set up the company information on the **Payments** FastTab. -3. Choose the **OK** button. +3. Choose the **OK** button. + +## See Also -## See Also [Set Up Bank Accounts](../../bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md) diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices.md index 9a02e4feb..3222f1605 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices.md @@ -1,9 +1,6 @@ --- title: How to Print ESR Invoices [CH] description: This topic describes how you can print an Einzahlungsschein mit Referenznummer (ESR) payment slip invoices and coupons. - - services: project-madeira - documentationcenter: '' author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -17,6 +14,7 @@ --- # Print ESR Invoices in the Swiss Version + You can print an Einzahlungsschein mit Referenznummer (ESR) payment slip in the following ways: - As part of the sales invoice ESR. @@ -25,23 +23,23 @@ You can print an Einzahlungsschein mit Referenznummer (ESR) payment slip in the The sales invoice ESR report corresponds with the sales invoice that is accompanied by an additional ESR coupon. By using the sales ESR coupon report, you can print the blue deposit slip. > [!NOTE] -> You must select a printer and select settings during the ESR payment module installation to print the deposit slip correctly. For more information, see the Printer Selection table. +> You must select a printer and select settings during the ESR payment module installation to print the deposit slip correctly. For more information, see the Printer Selection table. The following procedure describes how to print ESR sales invoices, but the same steps also apply for printing ESR coupons. ## To print ESR invoices -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Invoice ESR**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales Invoice ESR** batch job, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Invoice ESR**, and then choose the related link. +2. In the **Sales Invoice ESR** batch job, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. |Field|Description| |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| |**No. of copies**|Enter the required number of report copies.| - |**ESR Bank**|Select the ESR bank code that is to be printed in the report.

If the value in this field is and the ESR payment method code is not defined on the **ESR Setup** page, then the ESR main bank selected on the **ESR Setup** page will be printed.| + |**ESR Bank**|Select the ESR bank code that is to be printed in the report.

If the value in this field is \ and the ESR payment method code is not defined on the **ESR Setup** page, then the ESR main bank selected on the **ESR Setup** page will be printed.| |**LogInteraction**|Specify if the interactions that you have with your contacts will be logged.| |**ESR System**|Select the ESR system through which you can send new ESR coupons to customers. To use the ESR system that is used by the bank that you have specified in **ESR Bank** field, select **Based on ESR Bank**.| -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. +3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. You can also reprint the sales invoice ESR report or sales ESR coupon report. diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service.md index daf775266..b3ab397dc 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -title: GetAddress.io UK Postcodes Extension [GB] +title: Set Up GetAddress.io Extension [GB] description: Learn how to configure the GetAddress.io extension in the British version of Business Central. author: bholtorf ms.service: dynamics365-business-central diff --git a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/includes/CAMXUS/unrealized-sales-tax-sales-payment-discounts-setup.md b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/includes/CAMXUS/unrealized-sales-tax-sales-payment-discounts-setup.md index 63feec5a4..2ad80f12d 100644 --- a/business-central/LocalFunctionality/includes/CAMXUS/unrealized-sales-tax-sales-payment-discounts-setup.md +++ b/business-central/LocalFunctionality/includes/CAMXUS/unrealized-sales-tax-sales-payment-discounts-setup.md @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ You can use the **General Ledger Setup** page to set up unrealized sales tax. Yo > If you work with excise tax, the system does not allow you to change the **Tax Amount** field on the **Statistics** page for an invoice, for example to adjust for rounding. Therefore, if you have set up an excise tax with more than two decimals and you experience a rounding difference compared to your vendor's invoices, then you must handle the rounding difference by posting an extra G/L entry so that the total matches the document amount. This posting could be made to an expense account dedicated to amount rounding. ## To set up unrealized sales tax -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. |Field|Description| @@ -23,20 +23,20 @@ You can use the **General Ledger Setup** page to set up unrealized sales tax. Yo 3. Choose the **OK** button. ## To set up unrealized tax for jurisdictions -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Tax Jurisdictions**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Tax Jurisdictions**, and then choose the related link. 2. On the **Tax Jurisdictions** page, choose the **Edit List** action. 3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. |Field|Description| |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Unrealized Tax Type**| – The unrealized tax feature is not used for this tax jurisdiction.

–or–

**Percentage** – Each payment covers both tax amounts and invoice amounts in proportion to the remaining invoice amount. The paid tax amount is transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account.

–or–

**First** – Payments cover the tax first, and then the invoice amount.

–or–

**Last** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, and then the tax amount. In this case, nothing will be transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account until the total invoice amount—exclusive of tax—has been paid.

–or–

**First (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the tax first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid.

–or–

**Last (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid. **Important:** This field is available on the **Tax Jurisdiction** page, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| + |**Unrealized Tax Type**|\ – The unrealized tax feature is not used for this tax jurisdiction.

–or–

**Percentage** – Each payment covers both tax amounts and invoice amounts in proportion to the remaining invoice amount. The paid tax amount is transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account.

–or–

**First** – Payments cover the tax first, and then the invoice amount.

–or–

**Last** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, and then the tax amount. In this case, nothing will be transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account until the total invoice amount—exclusive of tax—has been paid.

–or–

**First (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the tax first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid.

–or–

**Last (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid. **Important:** This field is available on the **Tax Jurisdiction** page, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Sales)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on sales transactions. **Important:** This field is available on the **Tax Jurisdiction** page, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Purchases)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available on the **Tax Jurisdiction** page, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| |**Unreal. Rev. Charge (Purch.)**|The general ledger account that you want to use for posting calculated unrealized reverse-charge tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available on the **Tax Jurisdiction** page, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| 4. Choose the **OK** button. ## To set up adjustments for payment discounts in a tax posting group -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Tax Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 3.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Tax Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **Edit** action. 3. On the **Tax Posting Setup Card** page, select the **Adjust for Payment Discount** check box. @@ -45,13 +45,13 @@ You can use the **General Ledger Setup** page to set up unrealized sales tax. Yo 4. Choose the **OK** button. ## To set up maximum tax correction amounts -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 4.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. On the **Sales Receivables Setup** page, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. 3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. +4. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 5.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. 5. On the **Purchases & Payables Setup** page, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. 6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. +7. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 6.](../../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. 8. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, in the **Max. Tax Difference Allowed** field, enter the maximum tax correction amount that is allowed for the local currency. > [!NOTE] diff --git a/business-central/TOC.md b/business-central/TOC.md index 76176a995..26af9e285 100644 --- a/business-central/TOC.md +++ b/business-central/TOC.md @@ -97,6 +97,12 @@ ### [Getting Started with a Subscription](across-preview.md#getting-started-with-a-subscription) ### [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) +## Quick Starts +### [Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) +### [Set up Company Information](quick-start-company-information.md) +### [Sell Products and Services](quick-start-sell-products-and-services.md) +### [Buy Products and Services](quick-start-procurement.md) + ## Setting Up Business Central ### [Overview of Tasks](setup.md) @@ -136,6 +142,7 @@ #### [Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md) #### [Enable Customer Payments Through Payment Services](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md) #### [Record Special Sales Prices and Discounts](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md) +#### [Set Up Customer Price Groups](sales-how-to-set-up-customer-price-groups.md) #### [Set Up Salespeople](sales-how-setup-salespeople.md) #### [Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md) #### [Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) @@ -243,14 +250,16 @@ #### [Tips and Tricks: RapidStart Services](admin-tips-and-tricks-rapidstart-services.md) ### Setting Up Email #### [Set Up Email](admin-how-setup-email.md) -#### Set Up Your Business Inbox in Microsoft Outlook -##### [Using Business Central as Your Business Inbox in Outlook](admin-outlook.md) +#### Set Up Your Business Inbox in Microsoft Outlook +##### [Get the Business Central Add-in for Outlook](admin-outlook.md) +##### [Using Business Central as Your Business Inbox in Outlook](work-outlook-addin.md) ##### [Synchronize with Contacts in Outlook](admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md) ##### [Optimize Outlook](admin-outlook-optimize.md) -##### [Using Business Central Without Outlook](admin-no-outlook.md) +##### [Using Business Central without Outlook](admin-no-outlook.md) ### Setting Up Reports #### [Report Selection](across-report-selections.md) ### Setting Up Connections +#### [Get the Business Central Add-in for Excel](admin-deploy-excel-addin.md) #### Using Business Central as Your Business Inbox in Outlook ##### [Overview](admin-outlook.md) ##### [Synchronize with Contacts in Microsoft Outlook](admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md) @@ -260,10 +269,15 @@ ##### [Managing Teams Integration](admin-teams-integration.md) ##### [Installing Business Central App for Teams](across-install-app-for-teams.md) ##### [Searching for Customers, Vendors, and Contacts](across-search-contacts-teams.md) -##### [Sharing Records in Teams](across-working-with-teams.md) +##### [Sharing Records and Page Links in Teams](across-working-with-teams.md) ##### [Changing Company and Other Settings](across-teams-settings.md) ##### [Teams FAQ](teams-faq.md) ##### [Troubleshooting](admin-teams-troubleshooting.md) +#### Using OneDrive for Business with Business Central +##### [Overview](across-onedrive-overview.md) +##### [Managing OneDrive for Business Integration](admin-onedrive-integration.md) +##### [Opening Business Central Files in OneDrive](across-share-onedrive.md) +##### [OneDrive FAQ](admin-onedrive-faq.md) #### Using Power BI with Business Central ##### [Introduction](admin-powerbi.md) ##### Administrator @@ -288,6 +302,8 @@ ### [Set Up Base Calendars](across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md) ### [Set Up Printers](ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md) ### [Get Business Central on Your Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) +### [Get Business Central on Your Desktop](install-desktop-app.md) + ## Frequently Asked Questions ### [Frequently Asked Questions](across-faq.yml) @@ -332,6 +348,7 @@ ## [Detecting Mandatory Fields](ui-mandatory-fields.md) ## [Changing Language and Region](about-locale-language.md) ## [Viewing and Editing in Excel](across-work-with-excel.md) +## [Storing and Sharing Files in OneDrive](across-share-onedrive.md) ## [Manage Attachments, Links, and Notes on Cards and Documents](ui-how-add-link-to-record.md) ## [Using Word Templates for Bulk Communication](ui-mail-merge.md) ## [Change Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md) @@ -612,6 +629,7 @@ ### [Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md) ### [Create Special Orders](sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md) ### [Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md) +### [Process Sales Return Orders](sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md) ### [Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md) ### [Work with Blanket Sales Orders](sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md) ### [Combine Shipments on a Single Invoice](sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md) @@ -657,7 +675,7 @@ ### [Set Up Item Tracking with Serial, Lot, and Package Numbers](inventory-how-setup-item-tracking.md) ### [Track Items with Serial, Lot, and Package Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md) ### [Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md) -### [Use Item Cross References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md) +### [Use Item References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md) ### [Block Items](inventory-how-block-items.md) ### [Work with Responsibility Centers](inventory-responsibility-centers.md) @@ -955,10 +973,12 @@ ##### [Fixed Asset Localization for Czech (Extension)](LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-fixed-asset-localization-cz.md) #### Banking and Payments ##### [Bank Feature](LocalFunctionality/Czech/bank-feature.md) +##### [Banking Documents Localization for Czech (Extension)](LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-banking-documents-localization-cz.md) ##### [Cash Desk Management](LocalFunctionality/Czech/cash-desk-management.md) ##### [Cash Desk Localization for Czech (Extension)](LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-cash-desk-localization-cz.md) ##### [Registration of Sales (EET)](LocalFunctionality/Czech/eet.md) ##### [Advances](LocalFunctionality/Czech/advances.md) +##### [Advance Payments Localization for Czech (Extension)](LocalFunctionality/Czech/ui-extensions-advance-payments-localization-cz.md) #### Payables and Receivables ##### [Payables and Receivables](LocalFunctionality/Czech/receivables-payables.md) ##### [Intrastat](LocalFunctionality/Czech/intrastat.md) @@ -1175,6 +1195,8 @@ ##### [TCS Threshold](LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Threshold.md) ##### [TCS Adjustment Entry](LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Adjustment-Entries.md) ##### [TCS Payment to Authority](LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-Payment-to-Authority.md) +##### [TDS 194Q Section Overview](LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Section-Overview.md) +##### [TDS 194Q Transactions](LocalFunctionality/India/TDS-194Q-Transactions.md) ##### [206C-1H-Overview](LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-206C-1H-Overview.md) ##### [206C-1H-Transaction](LocalFunctionality/India/TCS-206C-1H-Transactions.md) #### Voucher Interface @@ -1192,6 +1214,7 @@ ##### [Subcontracting Transactions](LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-Transactions.md) ##### [Create GST Liability](LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-Create-GST-Liability.md) ##### [Subcontracting Report](LocalFunctionality/India/Subcontracting-Reports.md) +#### [Stale Cheque](LocalFunctionality/India/Stale-Check.md) ### Italy #### [Local Functionality in the Italian Version](LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality.md) @@ -1607,6 +1630,7 @@ ### [Logging Changes](across-log-changes.md) ### [Using Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md) ### [Manage Storage by Compressing Data or Deleting Documents](admin-manage-documents.md) +### [Archive Data](admin-archive-data.md) ### [Defining Data Retention Policies](admin-data-retention-policies.md) ### [Publishing a Web Service](across-how-publish-web-service.md) ### [Configuring API Templates](admin-configuring-api-template.md) @@ -1617,7 +1641,7 @@ ### [Viewing Table Information](admin-view-table-information.md) ### [Enabling New Features Ahead of Time](admin-feature-management.md) ### [Onboard Users with Checklists](admin-checklist.md) -### [Sandbox Environments](across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md) +### [Sandbox Environments](admin-sandbox-environments.md) ## Customizing Business Central ### [Customization Overview](ui-customizing-overview.md) ### [Customize Pages for Profiles](ui-personalization-manage.md) diff --git a/business-central/about-locale-language.md b/business-central/about-locale-language.md index 29a7a8fae..62e5b22e5 100644 --- a/business-central/about-locale-language.md +++ b/business-central/about-locale-language.md @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Changing the texts that are stored as application data is not part of the multil > [!NOTE] > [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] only supports a single character set for data. Therefore some characters may not be supported in your environment, and you may experience problems when retrieving data that was entered using a different character set. For instance, your environment may support only English and Russian characters and if you enter data in a different language, it may not be stored correctly. You should contact your system administrator to make sure you understand which languages are supported for your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. -## Changing the region +## Changing your region setting Region is different from both language and legal requirements in local markets. Region determines how your data presents itself in terms of comma separator, aligned to the left or to the right, and certain other settings. The region also determines some of the system elements in the browser, such as the action to create a new item in a list, for example. You can change the region in the browser tab that you are using to work in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. The change applies only to you and not to the other users in your company. The choice of region will be reset to your setting on your Microsoft 365 profile if your administrator synchronizes users from Microsoft 365 into [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. @@ -39,6 +39,11 @@ You can change the region in the browser tab that you are using to work in [!INC To change the region, go to the **My Settings** page. For more information, see [Change Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md). +## Changing the Region Setting for Customers, Contacts, and Vendors +Some businesses use an external service that validates address information in their country or region. However, when you need to update address information, the structured approach that these services use may not always be what's right for some scenarios. Business Central offers a more flexible means of entering address details. + +On the **General Ledger Setup** page, if you turn on the **Require Country/Region Code in Address** toggle, changes to the **Country/Region Code** field on addresses for customers, contacts, or vendors will reset the values in other address fields. + ## Application Version In the **Help and Support** page, you can see the version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] that your company is based on. If you want to base a company on a different version, your administrator can create a new production environment. For more information, see [Create a new production environment](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center-environments#create-a-new-production-environment) in the developer- and IT Pro content. diff --git a/business-central/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md b/business-central/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md index 3688f5e4e..e397bd3c2 100644 --- a/business-central/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md +++ b/business-central/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md @@ -27,19 +27,19 @@ As an administrator or Microsoft partner, you can use the framework in new integ ## Electronic Documents -As an alternative to emailing as file attachments, you can send and receive business documents electronically. By electronic document is meant a standard-compliant file representing a business document, such as an invoice from a vendor that you can receive and convert to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] . The exchange of electronic documents between two trading partners is performed by an external provider of document exchange services. The generic version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] supports sending and receiving electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest providers of document exchange services. A major provider of document exchange services is preconfigured and ready to be set up for your company. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you must create new date exchange definitions using the Data Exchange Framework. +As an alternative to emailing business documents as file attachments, you can send and receive them electronically. An "electronic document" is a standard-compliant file representing a business document, such as an invoice from a vendor that you can receive and convert to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Trading partners exchange electronic documents through external document exchange services. By default, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] supports sending and receiving electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest providers of document exchange services. A major provider of document exchange services, Tradeshift, is pre-configured and ready to be set up for your company. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you must create new data exchange definitions. - From PDF or image files representing incoming documents, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) create electronic documents that you can then convert to document records in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], like for electronic PEPPOL documents. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** page. After a few seconds, you receive the file back as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. If you send the file to the OCR service by email, then a new incoming document record is automatically created when you receive the electronic document back. +From PDF or image files representing incoming documents, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) create electronic documents that you can then convert to document records in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], like for electronic PEPPOL documents. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** page. After a few seconds, you receive the file back as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. If you send the file to the OCR service by email, then a new incoming document record is automatically created when you receive the electronic document back. - To send, for example, a sales invoice as an electronic PEPPOL document, you select the **Electronic Document** option in the **Post and Send** dialog box. From here, you can also set up the customer's default document sending profile. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, customers, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to elements in the outgoing document file. The data conversion and sending of the PEPPOL sales invoice are performed by dedicated codeunits and XMLports, represented by the **PEPPOL** electronic document format. +To send, for example, a sales invoice as an electronic PEPPOL document, you select the **Electronic Document** option in the **Post and Send** dialog box. From here, you can also set up the customer's default document sending profile. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, customers, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to elements in the outgoing document file. The data conversion and sending of the PEPPOL sales invoice are performed by dedicated codeunits and XMLports, represented by the **PEPPOL** electronic document format. - To receive, for example, an invoice from a vendor as an electronic PEPPOL document, you process the document on the **Incoming Documents** page to convert it to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can either set up the Job Queue feature to process such files regularly or you can start the process manually. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, vendors, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in elements in the incoming document file to fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. The receiving and data conversion of PEPPOL invoices are performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **PEPPOL - Invoice** data exchange definition. +To receive, for example, an invoice from a vendor as an electronic PEPPOL document, you process the document on the **Incoming Documents** page to convert it to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can either set up the Job Queue feature to process such files regularly or you can start the process manually. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, vendors, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in elements in the incoming document file to fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. The receiving and data conversion of PEPPOL invoices are performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **PEPPOL - Invoice** data exchange definition. To receive, for example, an invoice as an electronic OCR document, you process it as when you receive an electronic PEPPOL document. The receiving and conversion of electronic documents from OCR are performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **OCR – Invoice** data exchange definition. ## Bank Files -The formats of files for exchanging bank data with ERP systems vary depending on the supplier of the file and the country or region. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] supports import and export of SEPA bank files (Single Euro Payments Area) and the AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension lets you connect to a AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension provided by external provider, AMC Consult. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you use the Data Exchange Framework. +The formats of files for exchanging bank data with business management applications vary depending on the supplier of the file and the country or region. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] supports import and export of Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) bank files. Additionally, the AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension lets you connect to a AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension provided by an external provider, AMC Consult. For more information, see [Make Payments with the AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension or SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md). To provide support for other electronic document formats, you use the Data Exchange Framework. To export SEPA credit transfers, you choose **Export Payments to File** button on the **Payment Journal** page and then upload the file to process the payments in your bank. First you must set up various master data, such as bank account, vendors, and payment methods. The data conversion and export of SEPA bank data is performed by a dedicated codeunit and XMLport, represented by the **SEPA Credit Transfer** bank export/import setup. Alternatively, you can set up the AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension to perform the export, represented by the **AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals extension - Credit Transfer** data exchange definition. diff --git a/business-central/across-business-functionality.md b/business-central/across-business-functionality.md index 3c51727df..a13e3f1fc 100644 --- a/business-central/across-business-functionality.md +++ b/business-central/across-business-functionality.md @@ -14,9 +14,10 @@ ms.author: edupont --- # Business Functionality + [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] provides functionality for common business processes in small and mid-sized companies, mainly within wholesale and professional services. However, more complex processes, such as assembly, manufacturing, service, and directed warehouse management are also supported. -[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit your business' needs. From your Role Center, you can access assisted setup guides that help you configure certain scenarios and add features to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Several areas of business functionality must be set up manually. For more information, see [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](setup.md). +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit your business' needs. From your Role Center, you can access assisted setup guides that help you configure certain scenarios and add features to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Several areas of business functionality must be set up manually. The [Business Central quick start](quick-start-business-central.md) articles can help you take the first steps into making [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] your own. For more information, see [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](setup.md). | To | See | | --- | --- | diff --git a/business-central/across-data-exchange.md b/business-central/across-data-exchange.md index e53c2368f..c5d4de03c 100644 --- a/business-central/across-data-exchange.md +++ b/business-central/across-data-exchange.md @@ -17,9 +17,9 @@ # Exchanging Data Electronically You can use the Data Exchange Framework to manage the exchange of business documents, bank files, currency exchange rates, and any other data files with your business partners. -In the standard version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], the Data Exchange Framework is used in features, such as Electronic Documents, Bank File Import/Export, and Currency Exchange Rates Update. For more information, see [About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md). +In the standard version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], the Data Exchange Framework is used in processes such as exchanging electronic documents, importing and exporting bank files, and updating exchange rates for currencies. For more information, see [About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md). -As an administrator or Microsoft partner, you can use the framework in new integration features by setting up which data to exchange and how. For more information, see [Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). +As an administrator or Microsoft partner, you can use the framework in new integration features by specifying the data to exchange, and how to exchange it. For more information, see [Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. diff --git a/business-central/across-faq.yml b/business-central/across-faq.yml index 8ecd73fd2..432957038 100644 --- a/business-central/across-faq.yml +++ b/business-central/across-faq.yml @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ metadata: ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual ms.search.keywords: "FAQ, email, Microsoft 365, subscription, subscribe, trial, plan, application area, experience, support, buy, upgrade, extend" - ms.date: 08/24/2021 + ms.date: 09/29/2021 ms.author: edupont title: Frequently Asked Questions about Using Business Central @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ sections: From the community home page, you can also find links to our blogs where you can also find tips and tricks. For more information, see [Microsoft Dynamics 365 Business Central on the Dynamics 365 blog](https://cloudblogs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/it/product/business-central/) and the older [Dynamics 365 Business Central Blog](https://community.dynamics.com/business/b/financials). - Finally, you can contact your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] reselling partner. For more information, see the [How do I get technical support?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#hdigetsupport) and [How do I find a reselling partner?](#how-do-i-find-a-reselling-partner) sections. + Finally, you can contact your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] reselling partner. For more information, see the [How do I get technical support?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#how-do-i-get-technical-support-for-business-central) and [How do I find a reselling partner?](#how-do-i-find-a-reselling-partner) sections. - question: | Why can't I find that capability in my Business Central? diff --git a/business-central/across-how-to-create-workflows.md b/business-central/across-how-to-create-workflows.md index 5c3098341..8b3bfd153 100644 --- a/business-central/across-how-to-create-workflows.md +++ b/business-central/across-how-to-create-workflows.md @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ In the following example a new workflow is made to approve changes to the name o 2. In the **On Condition** field, choose the word **Always**, and then, in the **Event Conditions** page, choose the **Add a condition for when a field value changes** link, and then select the *Name* field. The result of this step is that the condition reads as *Name is Changed*. - 3. In the **Then Response** field, choose the **Select Response** link, and then, in the **Workflow Responses** page, in the **Select Response** field, choose the *Revert the value of the field on the record and save the change* response, and then, in the **Options for the Selected Response** section, specify the *Name* field. + 3. In the **Then Response** field, choose the **Select Response** link, and then, in the **Workflow Responses** page, in the **Select Response** field, choose the *Revert the value of the \ field on the record and save the change* response, and then, in the **Options for the Selected Response** section, specify the *Name* field. 4. Choose the **Add More Responses** link, and then add an entry for the *Create an approval request for the record using approver type <%1> and <%2>.* response. 5. In the **Options for the Selected Response** section for the new response, change the **Approver type** field to *Workflow User Group*, and then, in the **Workflow User Group** field, specify the relevant user group. diff --git a/business-central/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md b/business-central/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md index 9f92be412..9d915c6fb 100644 --- a/business-central/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md +++ b/business-central/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ --- - title: How to Set Up a Document Exchange Service - description: You use an external service provider to exchange electronic documents with your trading partners by using "Doc Exch. Service Setup". - author: SorenGP + title: How to Set Up a Document Exchange Service | Microsoft Docs + description: You use an external service provider to exchange electronic documents with your trading partners. + author: bholtorf ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual @@ -14,27 +14,50 @@ --- # Set Up a Document Exchange Service -You use an external service provider to exchange electronic documents with your trading partners. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). +As part of the Data Exchange Framework, you can exchange sales and purchase documents with your trading partners without extra steps, such as attaching the documents to email messages as PDF files. For example, when you're ready to invoice a customer, you can post the invoice and send it for payment as a file that your customer can receive in their business management application. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). -## To set up a document exchange service -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Doc. Exch. Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. +> [!NOTE] +> Setting up a document exchange service for Business Central on-premises requires some additional steps for authorization. For more information, see [Settings for Business Central On-Premises](#settings-for-business-central-on-premises). + +## Connecting with Trading Partners +Exchanging electronic documents requires a connection to your trading partners. To make it easy to create a secure connection, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online is configured to use the Business Central Integration app. The app is available on the Tradeshift App Store, and all you and your business partners need to do is create a Tradeshift account and then enable the app. The Business Central Integration app comes in production and sandbox versions. For example, using the sandbox version is good for testing the document exchange. You can switch between production and sandbox versions by turning the **Sandbox** toggle on or off on the **Doc. Exch. Service Setup** page. When you do, the information on the **Service** FastTab is updated for you. + +Alternatively, if you want to use another service, you must provide information to make the connection. For more information, see [To connect to a document exchange service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md#to-connect-to-a-document-exchange-service). + +## To connect to the Business Central Integration app on Tradeshift +You can quickly create a Tradeshift account and get started with the Business Central Integration app from the **Doc. Exch. Service Setup** page. Choose either the **Activate App** link in the notification or the **App URL** field to go to the app in the Tradeshift app store. On the Login page for Tradeshift, either sign in or sign up. + +> [!NOTE] +> After you sign in to your Tradeshift account, the site might not take you to the page where you activate the app. To do that, you can click the link on the **Doc. Exch. Service Setup** page in Business Central again to go directly to the app. + +If you decide to stop using the Business Central Integration app, you should disable it in the Tradeshift app store. + +## To connect to a document exchange service +If you prefer to use another document exchange service, you must provide some information to connect to the service. + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Document Exchange Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. Fill the fields as described in the following table. |Field|Description| |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**User Agent**|Enter any text that can be used to identify your company in document exchange processes.| - |**Doc. Exch. Tenant ID**|Enter the tenant in the document exchange service that represents your company. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Enabled**|Specify if the service is enabled. **Note:** As soon as you enable the service, at least two job queue entries are created to process the traffic of electronic documents in and out of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. When you disable the service, the job queue entries are deleted.| - |**Signup URL**|Specify the web page where you sign up for the document exchange service.| + |**User Agent**|Enter text that can be used to identify your company in document exchange processes.| + |**Enabled**|Specify whether the connection to the service is enabled.

**Note:** When you enable the service at least two job queue entries are created to send and receive electronic documents. When you disable the service, the job queue entries are deleted.| + |**Sandbox**|Specify whether you are connecting to a sandbox version of the document exchange service.| + |**Sign-up URL**|Specify the web page where you sign up for the document exchange service.| + |**App URL**|Choose the link to open the app store and turn the Business Central Integration app on or off.| |**Service URL**|Specify the address of the document exchange service, which will be called when you send and receive electronic documents.| - |**Login URL**|Specify the logon page for the document exchange service, which is where you enter your company’s user name and password to log on to the service.| - |**Consumer Key**|Enter the 3-legged OAuth key for the consumer key. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Consumer Secret**|Enter the secret that protects the consumer key. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Token**|Enter the 3-legged OAuth key for the token. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Token Secret**|Enter the secret that protects the token. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - + |**Sign-in URL**|Specify the URL for the page you use to sign in to the document exchange service. This is the page where you enter your company’s user name and password.| + > [!NOTE] - > You login data is automatically encrypted. + > Your sign in credentials are automatically encrypted. You cannot turn off encryption. + + > [!NOTE] + > If you cannot connect to the document exchange service because of an authorization issue, it might be because [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] cannot automatically renew the access token. For example, this might occur if you have not used the service for some time. You can renew the token manually by using the **Renew Token** action. + +## Settings for Business Central On-Premises +To connect Business Central on-premises, you must create an app on the Tradeshift App Store. When you do, use the redirect URL from the **Redirect URL** field on the **Document Exchange Service Setup** page. After you register your app, Tradeshift will provide a client ID and a client secret. In [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], enter those values on the **Authorization** FastTab on the **Document Exchange Service Setup** page. + +If you prefer to store the app ID and secret in a different location, you can leave the Client ID and Client Secret fields blank and write an extension to fetch the ID and secret from the location. You can provide the secret at runtime by subscribing to the OnGetClientId and OnGetClientSecret events in codeunit 1410 "Doc. Exch. Service Mgt." ## See Also [Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) diff --git a/business-central/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md b/business-central/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md index f2e0e2c1f..9eef2ff98 100644 --- a/business-central/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md +++ b/business-central/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md @@ -1,32 +1,30 @@ --- title: Approve or Reject Documents in Workflows| Microsoft Docs description: Request, reject, or delegate an approval of, for example, a purchase or sales document, as part of a workflow. -documentationcenter: '' author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: reject, delegate, request -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/28/2021 ms.author: edupont - --- # Use Approval Workflows + When a record, such as a purchase document or a customer card, needs to be approved by someone in your organization, you send an approval request as part of a workflow. Based on how the workflow is set up, the appropriate approver is then notified that the record requires their approval. -You set up approval workflows on the **Workflow** page. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md). +You set up approval workflows on the **Workflow** page. You must also set up approval users, including any relevant amount limits, in the **Approval User Setup** page. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md). In addition to approval workflows described in this topic, you can perform various other workflow tasks. For more information, [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md). Core approval workflows for purchases documents, sales documents, payment journals, customer cards, and item cards are ready to start as guides. For more information, see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). ## To request approval of a record + The following task is performed by an approval user. -1. on the page that presents the record, choose the **Send Approval Request** action. +1. On the page that presents the record, choose the **Send Approval Request** action. 2. To see all your approval requests, choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Approval Request Entries**, and then choose the related link. The status of the approval entry is updated from **Created** to **Open**. The status of the record, for example a purchase invoice, is updated from **Open** to **Pending Approval** and remains locked for processing until all approvers have approved the record. @@ -34,15 +32,17 @@ The status of the approval entry is updated from **Created** to **Open**. The st When the approver has approved the record, the status changes to **Released**. You can then continue your tasks with the record. ## To cancel requests for approval + The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. A customer may want to change an order after it has been submitted for approval. In this case, you can cancel the approval process and make the necessary changes to the order before you request approval again. -- on the page that displays the record, choose the **Cancel Approval Request** action. +- On the page that displays the record, choose the **Cancel Approval Request** action. When the approval request has been canceled, the status of the related approval entry is changed to **Canceled**. The status of the record is updated from **Pending Approval** to **Open**. The approval process can then start again. ## To approve or reject requests for approval + The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. You can process approval requests on the **Requests to Approve** page, for example to approve multiple requests at a time. Alternatively, you can process each request on the related record, such as the **Purchase Invoice** page, by choosing the link in the notification that you receive. @@ -58,6 +58,7 @@ If an approver hierarchy is set up, the record status will be **Pending Approval At the same time, the approval status changes from **Created** to **Open** as soon as an approval request for the record is created. If the request is rejected, the approval status changes to **Rejected**. The status remains **Open** or **Rejected** until all approvers have approved the request. ## To delegate requests for approval + The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. To prevent documents from piling up or otherwise block the workflow, the approver and the approval administrator can delegate an approval request to a substitute approver. The substitute can either be a designated substitute, the direct approver, or the approval administrator, in that order of priority. You typically use this feature if an approver is out of office and is unable to approve requests before the due date. @@ -68,6 +69,7 @@ To prevent documents from piling up or otherwise block the workflow, the approve A notification to approve the request is sent to the substitute approver. ## To manage overdue approval requests + The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. At regular intervals, you must remind approval workflow users of overdue approval requests that they must react on. You use the **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** function for this. @@ -78,10 +80,12 @@ The **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** function checks for all open approva 2. On the **Overdue Approval Requests** page, choose the **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** action. ## See Also -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) + +[Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) +[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) [Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) [Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) +[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) [!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md b/business-central/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md index 61935953a..0f2fcf8a9 100644 --- a/business-central/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md +++ b/business-central/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md @@ -65,11 +65,11 @@ Now you can proceed to create document records for the received electronic docum The following procedure describes how to create a purchase invoice record from a vendor invoice received as an electronic document from the OCR service. The procedure is the same when you create, for example, a general journal line from an expense receipt or a sales return order from a customer. > [!NOTE] -> The **Description** and **No.** fields on the created document lines will only be filled if you have first mapped text found on the OCR document to the two fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can do this mapping as item cross-references, for document lines of type Item. For more information, see [Use Item Cross References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). You can also use the Text-to-Account Mapping function. For more information, see [To map text on an incoming document to a specific vendor, G/L, or bank account](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md#to-map-text-on-an-incoming-document-to-a-specific-vendor-account). +> The **Description** and **No.** fields on the created document lines will only be filled if you have first mapped text found on the OCR document to the two fields in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can do this mapping as item references, for document lines of type Item. For more information, see [Use Item References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). You can also use the Text-to-Account Mapping function. For more information, see [To map text on an incoming document to a specific vendor, G/L, or bank account](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md#to-map-text-on-an-incoming-document-to-a-specific-vendor-account). 1. Select the line for the incoming document, and then choose the **Create Document** action. -A purchase invoice will be created in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] based on the information in the electronic vendor document that you received from the OCR service. Information will be inserted in the new purchase invoice based on the mapping that you have defined as a cross-reference or as text-to-account mapping. +A purchase invoice will be created in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] based on the information in the electronic vendor document that you received from the OCR service. Information will be inserted in the new purchase invoice based on the mapping that you have defined as a reference or as text-to-account mapping. Any validation errors, typically related to wrong or missing master data in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], will be shown on the **Errors and Warnings** FastTab. For more information, see [To handle errors when receiving electronic documents](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md#to-handle-errors-when-receiving-electronic-documents). diff --git a/business-central/across-install-app-for-teams.md b/business-central/across-install-app-for-teams.md index 9d06bbf82..57b551967 100644 --- a/business-central/across-install-app-for-teams.md +++ b/business-central/across-install-app-for-teams.md @@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ ms.author: jswymer In this article, you learn how to install the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] App for [Microsoft Teams](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/microsoft-teams). The app is available on the Teams marketplace, and you can use it with the Teams web, desktop, or mobile app. +> [!NOTE] +> Your administrator may have set things up so that the app is automatically installed for you. To check whether the app is installed, open Teams, then choose **Apps**. Search for **Business Central**, then choose it when you find it. If you see **Open** on the **Business Central** page, the app is already installed. + ## Prerequisites - A [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online user account is required for [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app for Teams. @@ -30,9 +33,9 @@ In this article, you learn how to install the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/pr ## Add the Business Central app to Teams -There are two ways to install the Business Central app: +There are three ways to install the Business Central app: -**Option 1** +**Option 1: From a link** This option is the quickest way to install the app. @@ -44,17 +47,24 @@ This option is the quickest way to install the app. 3. Select **Add**. -**Option 2** +**Option 2: From Teams** 1. Open and sign in to Teams. 2. In the left side, select **Apps**. 3. Search for **Business Central**. -4. Select the app when you find it. -5. Select **Add**. +4. Choose the app when you find it. +5. Choose **Add**. > [!NOTE] > With either option, You may be asked to sign in to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Select the **sign in** link, and follow the instructions to enter sign-in name and password for [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +**Option 3: From Business Central** + +1. Open Business Central. +2. Choose the ![Magnifying glass that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Get the Business Central app for Teams**, and then choose the related link. +3. Choose **Get the app from store**. +4. Wait for Teams to open and the Business Central app to appear, then choose **Add**. + ## Next step You're now ready to use the app in Teams to search for contacts or share Business Central records. For more information, see [Searching for Customers, Vendors, and Other Contacts from Microsoft Teams](across-search-contacts-teams.md) or [Share Records in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with-teams.md). diff --git a/business-central/across-onedrive-overview.md b/business-central/across-onedrive-overview.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38509d8fe --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/across-onedrive-overview.md @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +--- + title: Business Central and OneDrive for Business Integration + description: You can use OneDrive for Business to store, manage, and share files, such as reports or file attachments. + author: bholtorf + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: conceptual + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: + ms.date: 06/11/2021 + ms.author: bholtorf + +--- + +# Business Central and OneDrive for Business Integration +OneDrive for Business is a cloud storage service that is included in Microsoft 365. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] makes it easy to store, manage, and share files with other people through OneDrive. When a file is in your OneDrive you can enjoy the rich collaborative experiences from the online versions of Microsoft products, such as Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. For example, you can share a Word document, and then you and your colleagues can edit it together in real-time. OneDrive also lets you open other types of files, such as PDFs. + +## Getting Started +We've created the connection between [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online and OneDrive, so it's easy to get started. The only requirement is that users have opened OneDrive at least one time. + +On most pages where files are available, such as the Report Inbox or files that are attached to records, you'll find an **Open in OneDrive** action. + +:::image type="content" source="media/Open in OneDrive.PNG" alt-text="The Open in OneDrive action"::: + + +:::image type="content" source="media/OneDrive attachment.PNG" alt-text="Share file attachments in OneDrive"::: + +When you use the **Open in OneDrive** action for the first time, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does the following in your OneDrive: + +1. Creates a folder named [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +2. In the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] folder, it creates another folder with the same name as the company you're working in. If you work in more than one company, it will create a folder for the company you're working in when you use the **Open in OneDrive** action. +3. Puts a copy of the file you selected in the folder, and then opens the file. The next time you use the action, it only copies and opens the file. + +The folder and its content are private until you decide to share them with others. For example, you might decide to share content with one or more of your coworkers, or even people outside of your organization. For more information, see [Share OneDrive files and folders](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/share-onedrive-files-and-folders-9fcc2f7d-de0c-4cec-93b0-a82024800c07). + +> [!NOTE] +> You can also connect your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises to OneDrive. However, there are a few things to do to make it work. For more information, see [Configuring Business Central On-Premises](admin-onedrive-integration.md#configuring-business-central-on-premises). + +## See Also +[Managing OneDrive Integration with Business Central](admin-onedrive-integration.md) +[Opening Business Central Files in OneDrive](across-share-onedrive.md) +[OneDrive FAQ](admin-onedrive-faq.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/across-preview.md b/business-central/across-preview.md index 937bf8990..f7e4db939 100644 --- a/business-central/across-preview.md +++ b/business-central/across-preview.md @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: preview, trial, sandbox, subscription -ms.date: 09/07/2021 +ms.date: 09/29/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ You can sign up for a free trial [here](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid= Depending on your country or region, the trial includes the languages and functionality that your country or region requires. For more information, see [Changing Language and Locale](about-locale-language.md). -In [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], some things will be familiar to you, and other things might be unfamiliar. When you first sign in to the demonstration company, you get access to a Get Started page with links to assisted setup guides that can help you get started. For more information, see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). +In [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], some things will be familiar to you, and other things might be unfamiliar. When you first sign in to the demonstration company, you get access to a Get Started page with links to assisted setup guides that can help you get started. For more information, see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) and the [quick starts](quick-start-business-central.md) articles. If you encounter difficulties, the [Frequently Asked Questions](across-faq.yml) page can help you answer some of your questions. If you are unable to sign up for the trial, the [Troubleshooting Self-Service Sign-Up](ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md) page can help. You can also contact a [partner](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner) and ask them to create a free trial or a different type of preview of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] for you. @@ -31,15 +31,15 @@ If you decide not to use [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], you ca [!INCLUDE [admin-viral-trial-expiry](includes/admin-viral-trial-expiry.md)] -### Try Out Your Own Company +### Add Your Own Data to an Empty Trial Company -If you want to try out [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with your own data, you can switch to a free 30 day trial with an empty company. The **Set up my company** assisted setup guide can help you specify basic information about your business. Optionally, you can import data from your existing business management solution so that you can evaluate [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with your own data. However, we recommend that you do not use a free trial to help run your business. Contact [a reselling partner](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner) to learn more about how to get started with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +If you want to try out [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with your own data, you can switch to a free 30-day trial with an empty company. The **Set up my company** assisted setup guide can help you specify basic information about your business. Optionally, you can import data from your existing business management solution so that you can evaluate [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with your own data. However, we recommend that you do not use a free trial to help run your business. Contact [a reselling partner](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner) to learn more about how to get started with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. If 30 days are not enough for you to decide, you can extend your trial. For more information, see [Need More Time to Decide Whether to Subscribe?](admin-extend-trial.md). ### Setting Up Your Company in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] -To help you set up your company, the **Assisted Setup** page lists the assisted setup guides that can help you. Depending on your role and country or region, the page shows different assistant setup guides as illustrated in the following table: +The [quick start](quick-start-business-central.md) articles can help you take the first steps into setting up [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] for your organization. Inside [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], the **Assisted Setup** page lists the assisted setup guides that can help you. Depending on your role and country or region, the page shows different assistant setup guides as illustrated in the following table: | Assisted Setup | Description | | -------------- | ----------- | @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ To help you set up your company, the **Assisted Setup** page lists the assisted | Set Up Reporting Data|Sets up data sets that you can use to build powerful reports using Excel or Power BI, for example. | | Invite External Accountant |If you use an external accountant to manage your books and financial reporting, you can invite them to your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] so they can work with you on your fiscal data. | -The **Assisted Setup** page may contain other entries. When you go through a setup, the setup will be marked as **Completed**. You can set up additional areas of the company by using manual setup. For more information, see [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](setup.md). +The **Assisted Setup** page may contain other entries. When you go through a setup, the setup will be marked as **Completed**. You can set up other areas of the company by using manual setup. For more information, see [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](setup.md). ### Resetting your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] trial experience @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ If you have added data to your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] fr ## Getting Started with a Subscription -Each time you sign in during the trial period, a notification in a blue bar at the top displays the time remaining. If you decide to subscribe, find a [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partner. For more information, see [How do I find a reselling partner?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner). The reselling partner can help you set up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to fit your business, including importing your data from your previous system. You can also customize [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] by adding apps from [Microsoft AppSource](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2081646). +Each time you sign in during the trial period, a notification in a blue bar at the top displays the time remaining. If you decide to subscribe, find a [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partner. For more information, see [How do I find a reselling partner?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner). The reselling partner can help you set up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to fit your business, including importing your data from your previous system. You can also customize [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] by adding apps from [the Microsoft commercial marketplace](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2081646). [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online uses Microsoft 365. If your company uses a different type of email setup, the reselling partner can help you decided how to migrate, or if you should use [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises. @@ -81,21 +81,20 @@ For more information about what you can do with [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/ ## Getting Started with Sandboxes -Sandbox environments can be a way for you to practice with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Think of a sandbox as a non-production environment that you can use on top of your production instance of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For example, if you want to take the free online training from [Microsoft Learn](/learn/dynamics365/business-central?WT.mc_id=dyn365bc_landingpage-docs), your administrator can [create a sandbox environment](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center-environments#create-a-sandbox-environment) so that you and your colleagues can practice there rather than in your production environment. +Sandbox environments can be a way for you to practice with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Think of a sandbox as a non-production environment that you can use on top of your production instance of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For example, if you want to take the free online training from [Microsoft Learn](/learn/dynamics365/business-central?WT.mc_id=dyn365bc_landingpage-docs), your administrator can [create a sandbox environment](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center-environments#create-a-sandbox-environment). This way, you and your colleagues can practice in a safe place rather than in your production environment. If you are a developer, a sandbox lets you safely build and test extensions and develop new functionality to customize the service without affecting the data and settings of your production environment. -Right now, all customers can use a sandbox, including organizations who have signed up for a trial. For more information about how to get started with a sandbox, see [Creating a Sandbox Environment](across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md). +Right now, all customers can use a sandbox, including organizations who have signed up for a trial. For more information about how to get started with a sandbox, see [Sandbox Environments](admin-sandbox-environments.md). > [!NOTE] > Sandboxes created this way contain demonstration data for the fictitious CRONUS company. No data is copied or otherwise transferred from the production environment. -The administrator of your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and your reselling partner can create additional environments in the administration center. For more information, see [The Business Central Administration Center](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center). - - +The administrator of your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and your reselling partner can create more environments in the administration center. For more information, see [The Business Central Administration Center](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center). ## See Also +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) [Extending Your Trial Version](admin-extend-trial.md) [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/business-central/across-share-onedrive.md b/business-central/across-share-onedrive.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc8ed16ce --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/across-share-onedrive.md @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +--- + title: Using OneDrive for Business with Business Central + description: You can use OneDrive for Business to store, manage, and share files, such as reports or file attachments. + author: bholtorf + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: conceptual + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: + ms.date: 06/11/2021 + ms.author: bholtorf + +--- +# Opening Business Central Files in OneDrive +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] makes it easy to store, manage, and share files with other people through OneDrive for Business. On most pages where files are available, such as the Report Inbox or files that are attached to records, you'll find an **Open in OneDrive** action. + +:::image type="content" source="media/Open in OneDrive.PNG" alt-text="The Open in OneDrive action"::: + + +:::image type="content" source="media/OneDrive attachment.PNG" alt-text="Share file attachments in OneDrive"::: + +## Working with Different Types of Files +When you choose **Open in OneDrive**, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] identifies Excel, Word, and PowerPoint files and opens them in their online applications, that is, Excel online, Word online and PowerPoint online. You can annotate, edit, and collaborate with others without leaving the browser. + +For other popular file types, such as PDFs, text files, and images, OneDrive provides file viewers that offer features for printing, sharing, and more. If a file cannot be viewed in OneDrive, you might be prompted to download it. + +## Managing Multiple Copies of a File +When you choose **Open in OneDrive**, the file is copied from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to your folder in OneDrive. If you edit the file in OneDrive, the copies of the file will be different. To update [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with the latest file, remove the existing file from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and then upload the latest copy. + +Additionally, when you use the Open in OneDrive action and a file with that name already exists in OneDrive, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] will provide a choice to either replace the file or keep both files. If you choose to keep both files, the new file is copied to OneDrive and its file name is given a suffix, such as “Items (2).xlsx,” and the original file is not changed. + +If you choose to replace the file, the new file is added to the version history for that file. The original file isn't lost, and you can view or restore previous versions of the file. + +## Accessing Your OneDrive +You can access your OneDrive from the **My Settings** page by choosing the link in the **Cloud Storage** field. + +:::image type="content" source="media/my-settings-cloud-storage.PNG" alt-text="The Cloud Storage field in My Settings"::: + + + +## See Also +[Business Central and OneDrive Integration](across-onedrive-overview.md) +[Managing OneDrive Integration with Business Central](admin-onedrive-integration.md) +[OneDrive FAQ](admin-onedrive-faq.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/across-teams-overview.md b/business-central/across-teams-overview.md index 9f6b86509..75c4c69a9 100644 --- a/business-central/across-teams-overview.md +++ b/business-central/across-teams-overview.md @@ -46,6 +46,14 @@ Once in the conversation, you and coworkers can view more details about the reco For more information, see [Share Records in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with-teams.md). +### Share links from pages in Business Central to Teams + +Directly from most collection and details pages in Business Central, you can use the **Share to Teams** action from the ![!The Share menu icon on pages.](media/share-icon.png "The Share menu displayed on a card.") icon to type a message, choose recipients, such as team members, groups or channels, and send the message with a link to the Business Central page. + +![!The Share menu displayed on a card.](media/teams-share-link.png "The Share menu displayed on a card.") + +For more information, see [Share Records and Page Links in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with-teams.md#share-link). + ## Get Started 1. A [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online user account is required for [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app for Teams. @@ -57,7 +65,7 @@ For more information, see [Share Records in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with 2. As an administrator, see [Managing Microsoft Teams Integration with Business Central](admin-teams-integration.md) for information about getting users set up to work with [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and Teams. 3. Install [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app in Teams. See [Install the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] App for Microsoft Teams](across-install-app-for-teams.md). -4. Once the app is installed, you're ready to go. See [Searching for Customers, Vendors, and Other Contacts from Microsoft Teams](across-search-contacts-teams.md) and [Share Records in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with-teams.md). +4. Once the app is installed, you're ready to go. See [Searching for Customers, Vendors, and Other Contacts from Microsoft Teams](across-search-contacts-teams.md) and [Share Records in Microsoft Teams](across-working-with-teams.md). ## See Also diff --git a/business-central/across-work-with-excel.md b/business-central/across-work-with-excel.md index b6be36ceb..67496d4f9 100644 --- a/business-central/across-work-with-excel.md +++ b/business-central/across-work-with-excel.md @@ -14,17 +14,17 @@ ms.author: jswymer --- # Viewing and Editing in Excel From Business Central -With pages that display a list of records in rows and columns, like a list of customers, sale orders, or invoices, you can also view the records using Microsoft Excel. Depending on the page, you have two options for viewing in Excel. You can either select the **Open in Excel** action or the **Edit in Excel** action on the page. This article explains the differences between the two actions. +With pages that display a list of records in rows and columns, like a list of customers, sale orders, or invoices, you can export the list to Microsoft Excel, and view it there. Depending on the page, you have two options for viewing in Excel. Both options are available from the **Share** icon ![Share a page in another app.](media/share-icon.png) at the top of a page. You can either select the **Open in Excel** action or the **Edit in Excel** action on the page. This article explains the differences between the two actions. ## Open in Excel -With the **Open in Excel** action, you can make changes to the records in Excel, but you can't publish the changes back to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can only save the changes to Excel file on your computer. +With the **Open in Excel** action, you can make changes to the records in Excel, but you can't publish the changes back to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. You can only save the changes to Excel file, without affecting data in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. - With this action, Excel respects any filters on the page that limit the records shown. The Excel workbook will contain the same rows and columns that appear on the page in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. - This action works on both on Windows and macOS. -- Starting with update 18.3, you can also view lists that are shown in page parts, like the lines in a sales order. For now, this capability is an optional feature, which requires that you enable **Export any list part to Excel** in **Feature Management**. For more information, see [Enabling Upcoming Features Ahead of Time](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/feature-management). +- Starting with update 18.3, you can also view lists that are shown in page parts, like the lines in a sales order. > [!NOTE] > For [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises, the **Open in Excel** action is available by default. However, if you set up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises for editing data in Excel, then the **Open in Excel** action is replaced by the **Edit in Excel** action. @@ -33,23 +33,40 @@ With the **Open in Excel** action, you can make changes to the records in Excel, ## Edit in Excel -With the **Edit in Excel** action, you make changes to records in Excel and then publish the changes back to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +The **Edit in Excel** action is available on most lists, but not all. With the **Edit in Excel** action, you make changes to records in Excel and then publish the changes back to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. When Excel opens, you'll see the **Excel Add-in** pane on the right. - With this action, Excel respects most filters on the page that limit the records shown, so the Excel workbook will contain almost the same records and columns. -- It only works on Windows; not macOS. +- To get the latest data from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], choose **Refresh** in the the Excel Add-in pane. -- You can switch the company that you are working with. To switch company, select the **Options** icon ![Excel add-in options.](media/cogwheel.png "Excel add-in options") in the Excel Add-in pane, then select the company from the **Company** field. +- You can switch the company that you're working with. To switch company, select the **Options** icon ![Excel add-in options.](media/cogwheel.png "Excel add-in options") in the Excel Add-in pane, then select the company from the **Company** field. > [!IMPORTANT] > When changing the company, make sure that the **Environment** field is not empty. If it is, then set it to one of the available options; otherwise, the add-in will not work correctly. -If you make changes to the add-in, you must reload it to update the connection. To reload, use the ![Excel add-in menu](media/excel-addin-menu.png "Excel add-in menu") menu in the top-right corner of the add-in. If you cannot load the add-in, talk to your administrator. If you are the administrator, see [Setting up the Excel Add-In for Editing Business Central Data](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/configuring-excel-addin). +If you make changes to the add-in, you must reload it to update the connection. To reload, use the ![Excel add-in menu](media/excel-addin-menu.png "Excel add-in menu") menu in the top-right corner of the add-in. If you can't load the add-in, talk to your administrator. If you're the administrator, see [Get the Business Central Add-in for Excel](admin-deploy-excel-addin.md). > [!NOTE] +> The add-in works with Excel for the web (online) from any device as long as as use a supported browser. It also works with the Excel app for Windows (PC); but not for macOS. +> > For [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises, the **Edit in Excel** action is only available if the Excel add-in has been configured by your administrator, and only available for the Web client. For administrators, if you want to learn how to install the Excel add-in, see [Setting up the Excel Add-In for Editing Business Central Data](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/configuring-excel-addin). -### See the differences between the options + + + +### First-time sign-in + +The **Edit in Excel** action requires that the Business Central add-in is installed in Excel. In some cases, your administrator may have set up the add-in to install automatically for you. In this case, you just have to sign in to Business Central in **Excel Add-in** pane with your user name and password. Otherwise, the **New Office Add-in** pane opens. To install the add-in, choose **Trust this add-in**, which will install the add-in directly from the Office Store. + +If for some reason the add-in doesn't install, contact your admin or try to install it manually. For more information, see [Install the add-in manually for your own use](admin-deploy-excel-addin.md#install). + +## See the differences between the options

> [!Video https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2086039] diff --git a/business-central/across-working-with-powerbi.md b/business-central/across-working-with-powerbi.md index dd7b1c168..5a335be65 100644 --- a/business-central/across-working-with-powerbi.md +++ b/business-central/across-working-with-powerbi.md @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ To learn how to create reports for list pages, see [Creating Power BI Reports fo A Power BI part on a page can display any Power BI report that's available to you. To switch to view another report, choose the **Select Report** action from the drop-down command list at the top of the part. -The **Power BI Reports Selection** page shows a list of all the Power BI reports that you have access to. This list is retrieved from your Power BI workspace. Select the **Enable** box for each report that you want to display on the page, and then choose **OK**. You'll return to the page, and the last report you enabled will appear. Using the drop-down command list, use the **Previous** and **Next** commands to navigate between reports. +The **Power BI Reports Selection** page shows a list of all the Power BI reports that you have access to. This list is retrieved from any of your own workspaces or workspaces that have been shared with you in the Power BI service. Select the **Enable** box for each report that you want to display on the page, and then choose **OK**. You'll return to the page, and the last report you enabled will appear. Using the drop-down command list, use the **Previous** and **Next** commands to navigate between reports. ### Get more reports diff --git a/business-central/across-working-with-teams.md b/business-central/across-working-with-teams.md index 1efe4f0ee..41b55b945 100644 --- a/business-central/across-working-with-teams.md +++ b/business-central/across-working-with-teams.md @@ -12,22 +12,38 @@ ms.date: 05/19/2021 ms.author: jswymer --- -# Sharing Business Central Records in Microsoft Teams +# Sharing Business Central Records and Page Links in Microsoft Teams [!INCLUDE [online_only](includes/online_only.md)] -[!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] offers an app that connects Microsoft Teams to your business data in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], so you can quickly share details across team members and respond faster to inquiries. In this article, you'll learn how to use the app to share [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] records, like a customer, sales order, or invoice, with coworkers in a Teams conversation. +[!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] offers a couple ways to share data from Business Central directly in a Microsoft Teams conversation: + +- With the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app installed in Teams, you can include an interactive card of Business Central record in a Teams conversation. + + + +- With or without the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app installed, you can share a link from pages in Business Central to a Teams conversation. + + -- Copy a link to any Business Central record and paste it into a Teams conversation to share with your coworkers. The app will then expand the link into a compact, interactive card that displays information about the record. -- Once in the conversation, you and coworkers can view more details about the record, edit data, and take action—without leaving Teams. +The following sections describe the different ways in detail. + +## Include and view a Business Central card in a Teams conversation + +With the Business Central app for Teams, you can copy a link from any Business Central record, like a customer or sales order, and paste the link into a Teams conversation. The app connects Microsoft Teams to your business data in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. It then expands the link into a compact, interactive card that displays information about the record. Once in the conversation, you and coworkers can view more details about the record, edit data, and take action—without leaving Teams. [![Teams integration with Business Central.](media/teams-intro-v3.png)](media/teams-intro-v3.png#lightbox) -## Prerequisites +### Prerequisites - You have access to Microsoft Teams. - You've installed the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app in Teams. For more information, see [Install the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] App for Microsoft Teams](across-install-app-for-teams.md) @@ -35,12 +51,12 @@ The [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app lets you: > [!NOTE] > All participants in a Teams conversation will be able to view cards for Business Central records that you submit to the conversation. But to view more details about records, by using the **Details** or **Pop out** buttons on a card, they'll need access to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For more information, see [Managing Microsoft Teams Integration](admin-teams-integration.md#minimum-requirements-1). -## Include a Business Central card in a Teams conversation +### Include a Business Central card in a Teams conversation 1. Sign in to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] using your browser. 2. Open the record that you want to share. - The app is designed to display card type pages from [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. So open a page that displays a single record, like an item, customer, or sales order. You can't use it for role centers or pages that display several records in a list. + The app is designed to display card type pages from [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. So open a page that displays a single record, like an item, customer, or sales order. You can't use it for role centers or pages that display several records in a list. 3. Copy the entire URL from the browser's address bar. @@ -67,7 +83,7 @@ The [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app lets you: 10. To view more details or make changes to the record shown in the card, select **Details**. For more information, see the next section. -## View card details +### View card details Once a card's been sent to a conversation, all participants with the [proper permissions](admin-teams-integration.md#permissions) can select **Details** to open a window that displays more information about the record—and possibly make changes to the record. It doesn't matter if you're the one sending the card or the one receiving the card. The **Details** feature is especially useful to recipients, because it quickly provides them with concise, targeted information about the record, as opposed to having to scan the full record. @@ -75,11 +91,29 @@ The details window is similar to what you'd see in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includ Here are a couple things to keep in mind when working with the card details: -- To open the card details, users must have permission on the page and its data in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. -- Cards in Teams chats aren't automatically updated to changes. Any changes you save to a record in the details window are saved in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. But the card in Teams won't show the changes in the conversion, until you paste the link again. +- To open the card details, users must have permission on the page and its data in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. +- Cards in Teams chats aren't automatically updated to changes. Any changes you save to a record in the details window are saved in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. But the card in Teams won't show the changes in the conversion, until you paste the link again. To learn more about working with cards and card details, see [Teams FAQ](teams-faq.md). +## Share a link to page from Business Central to Teams + +Directly from most collection pages, like the **Items** page, and details pages, like the **Items** card, you can send a link to the page to specific recipients in a Teams conversation. For example, you can share a link to a filtered view of your records. Recipients can then select the link to open the page in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. + + ![!The Share menu displayed on a card.](media/teams-share-link.png "The Share menu displayed on a card.") + +### Prerequisites +You have access to Microsoft Teams. + +### Share a link + +1. In [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\, open the page that you want to share. +2. At the top of the page, choose the ![!Share to other apps action on pages.](media/share-icon.png) icon, then **Share to Teams**. +3. If you're asked, sign in to Teams with your user name and password. +4. In the **Share to Teams** page, type a name of a person, group, or channel that you want send the message to. +5. The message box will include a link to the page. Add any more information if you like, then choose **Share**. +6. The link has now been shared. If you want to go to the conversation, choose **Go to Teams**. + ## See Also [Business Central and Microsoft Teams Integration Overview](across-teams-overview.md) diff --git a/business-central/admin-archive-data.md b/business-central/admin-archive-data.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8494d3752 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/admin-archive-data.md @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +--- + title: The Data Archive Extension + description: Archiving data creates a low-cost backup of your records. + author: bholtorf + + ms.service: dynamics365-business-central + ms.topic: conceptual + ms.devlang: na + ms.tgt_pltfrm: na + ms.workload: na + ms.search.keywords: + ms.date: 06/14/2021 + ms.author: bholtorf + +--- + +# The Data Archive Extension +Over time, your business will accumulate a substantial amount of data, and as an administrator, it's probably a good idea to have a strategy for archiving data. Having lots of data can slow things down, for example, it might take slightly longer to generate reports, or even lock records. Additionally, large amounts of data can lead to increased storage costs. + +The Data Archive extension provides a basic framework for archiving and backing up data as part of date compression. When you use date compression, related entries are consolidated into a single entry, and the originals are deleted. For more information, see [Compress Data with Date Compression](admin-manage-documents.md#compress-data-with-date-compression). However, there might be value in keeping that data, so rather than deleting it, you can archive it for later use. + +## Start Archiving Data +The extension is pre-installed and available on the **Extension Management**, so you don't need to do anything to get started. The extension is also available on Microsoft AppSource. + +Your data archives are listed on the **Data Archive List** page. Each archive can contain data from multiple tables, and can hold up to 10,000 records. If there are more than 10,000 records in a table, a second archive will be created for the next 10,000 records, and so on. For example, if you archive 10,100 G/L entries, Business Central creates one "G/L Entry" archive for the first 10,000 entries, and then a second archive for the remaining 100 entries. + +After you archive data, you can explore it using Microsoft Excel or as a CSV file. + +* If you use the Excel option, the workbook will contain one worksheet for each data archive table. +* If you use the CSV option you'll get a ZIP file with one CSV file for each data archive table. + +> [!TIP] +> The Excel and CSV options make it easier to use another app or service to move the data to another location, such as Azure Blob storage, or analysis tool, such as Microsoft Power BI. + +The Data Archive extensions is used by the following batch jobs for date compression. + +|Batch jobs | +|---------| +|Date Comp. Item Budget Entries | +|Date Compress Bank Acc. Ledger | +|Date Compress Customer Ledger | +|Date Compress FA Ledger | +|Date Compress General Ledger | +|Date Compress Insurance Ledger | +|Date Compress Maint. Ledger | +|Date Compress Maint. Ledger | +|Date Compress Resource Ledger | +|Date Compress VAT Entries | +|Date Compress Vendor Ledger | +|Date Compress Whse. Entries | +|Date Compr. G/L Budget Entries | + +To start archiving data when you run one of the batch jobs, turn on the **Archive Deleted Entries** toggle. + +## Storage Considerations +The archived data is stored in the **Tenant Media** table. This table is not included when database size is calculated, according to your license terms. Instead, it counts as file storage. However, we recommend that you export old archives to, for example, a CSV file and then delete the old archive records. + +## See Also +[Manage Storage by Deleting Documents or Compressing Data](admin-manage-documents.md) diff --git a/business-central/admin-deploy-excel-addin.md b/business-central/admin-deploy-excel-addin.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4efe7e4c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/admin-deploy-excel-addin.md @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ +--- +title: Getting the Business Central Add-in for Excel +description: Learn about how to get users the Business Central add-in for Excel. +author: jswymer +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: Excel, add-in, centralized deployment, M365 admin center, individual acquisition, appsource +ms.date: 10/01/2021 +ms.author: jswymer + +--- +# Get the Business Central Add-in for Excel + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes an add-in for Excel that lets users select a **Edit in Excel** action on certain pages to open the data in an Excel worksheet. This action is different than the **Open in Excel** action because it lets users can make changes in Excel, then publish the changes back to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\ + +## Overview + +### About the add-in + +The add-in is called **Microsoft Dynamics Office Add-in** and it's available for installation from on the [Office Store (AppSource)](https://appsource.microsoft.com/). With the add-in installed, the **Edit in Excel** action is available on most list and list part pages from the **Share** icon ![Share a page in another app.](media/share-icon.png). For more information about using the add-in, see [Viewing and Editing in Excel From Business Central](across-work-with-excel.md) + +> [!NOTE] +> The add-in works on Windows only; not macOS. + +### About deployment as an admin + +With [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online, there are a few deployment options for getting the add-in to users. One option is *individual acquisition*, where you let users install the add-in themselves. With this option, users must have access to downloading files from the Office Store. Another option is to set up *Centralized Deployment* in the Microsoft 365 admin center to automatically deploy the add-in to your entire organization, groups, or specific users. Centralized Deployment provides a way to get the add-in to users if your organization doesn't give users access to the Office Store. + +For the end-user, the installation experience is different for the two deployment scenarios: + +- With individual acquisition, the first time users choose the **Edit in Excel** action, the **New Office Add-in** pane opens in Excel. To install the add-in, the user chooses **Trust this add-in**, which in turn installs the add-in directly from the Office Store. Users then sign in to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] using their user name and password. + +- With Centralized Deployment, the first time users choose the **Edit in Excel** action, the add-in is automatically installed in Excel from Centralized Deployment; not the Office Store. The only thing users have to do is sign in to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\ + +With both these deployment options, the add-in is automatically configured to connect to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\.A third deployment option is a manual installation of the add-in directly from Excel. With this option, users will need to configure the add-in to connect to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\ + +### Switching from individual acquisition to Centralized Deployment or the other way around + +When you change from individual acquisition of the add-in to Centralized Deployment, or vice versa, Excel files that users created before the transition are affected. After the transition, users can still open any Excel worksheets previously created using the **Edit in Excel** action or created manually by configuring the Excel add-in. But they can't update the data in the file from Business Central or push updates to Business Central + +This condition is caused by the fact that each Excel file gets assigned an "add-in" identifier. In the transition to or from Centralized Deployment, a different ID is assigned, so the earlier ID becomes blocked. + +## Preparation (on-premises only) + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises requires that your environment is configured for the add-in. If not, the **Edit in Excel** action won't be available to users. For more information, see [Setting up the Excel Add-In for Editing Business Central Data](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/configuring-excel-addin) in the Developer and IT Pro help. + +## Deploy the add-in by using Centralized Deployment + +Centralized Deployment is a feature in Microsoft 365 admin center that you use to automatically install add-ins in users' Office apps, like Excel. To help you with Centralized Deployment, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes the **Excel Add-in Centralized Deployment** assisted setup. + +### Before you begin + +- To learn about preventing users from downloading from the Office store, see [Manage add-ins in the admin center](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/manage-addins-in-the-admin-center). +- Verify that Centralized Deployment will work for your organization. For more information, see [Determine if Centralized Deployment of add-ins works for your organization](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/centralized-deployment-of-add-ins) +- If you're transitioning from individual acquisition, see [Switching from individual acquisition to Centralized Deployment](#switch) + +> [!NOTE] +> Enabling Centralized Deployment affects features that use the Excel add-in, such as the **Edit in Excel** action. It has no effect on other Excel-related features and or permissions assigned to users in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\ + +### Set up Centralized Deployment of the add-in + +You'll work in both [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and the Microsoft 365 admin center. + +1. In [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\, choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Excel Add-in Centralized Deployment**, then choose the related link. +2. Read the information on the **Business Central Excel add-in setup** page and choose **Next**. +3. Sign in to the [Microsoft 365 admin center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2163967) and go to **Integrated Apps**. + + Complete the following steps to configure the add-in to deploy from the Office Store: + 1. Choose **Get apps** to open Office Store (AppSource). + 2. Search for **Microsoft Dynamics Office Add-in**, then select **Get it now**. + 3. On the **Add Users** page, specify the users that you want to deploy the add-in for, then choose **Next**. + 4. Review the **Accept permissions requests**, then choose **Next** > **Finish Deployment**. + 5. Wait for the green check mark next to **Deployed** appears for the add-in, then choose **Done**. + + The add-in appears on the **Add-ins** page. For more information about deploying add-ins in the Microsoft 365 admin center, see [Deploy add-ins in the admin center](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/manage-deployment-of-add-in). +4. Go back to **Excel Add-in Centralized Deployment** assisted setup in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\, and choose **Next**. +5. Turn on **Use Centralized Deployment**, and choose **Finish**. + + If you don't turn on this switch, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] will get the add-in directly from the Office Store. + +When finished, you can always change the deployment in Microsoft 365 admin center, like assigning more users. For more information about deploying add-ins in the admin center, see [Deploy add-ins in the admin center](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/manage-deployment-of-add-in). + +> [!IMPORTANT] +> If you have more than one environment, you must run the **Excel Add-in Centralized Deployment** assisted setup on each environment that you want to use Centralized Deployment. However, you don't have to configure the Centralized Deployment in Microsoft 365 again. The only thing you have to do is turn on the **Use Centralized Deployment** switch in the assisted setup. + +> [!NOTE] +> It can take up to 24 hours before users the add-in deploys automatically in Excel of users. + +## Individual acquisition: Install the add-in manually for your own use + +In most cases, when you open Excel from Business Central, the add-in will either be installed automatically for you or you'll be prompted to install it. There might be cases, however, where you have to manually install the add-in. + +1. Open Excel, then open any Excel workbook. +2. On the **Insert** menu, choose **Add-ins** > **Get add-ins** +3. Go to **Admin managed** and look for **Microsoft Dynamics Office Add-In**. If you see there, select it, then choose **Add**. If you don't see it, go to **Store**, then search for *Microsoft Dynamics Office Add-In* and follow the instruction on screen to add it. + +When the add-in is installed, it shows up as a panel in Excel. Next, configure the connection. + +### Configure the Business Central connection + +If a user can't connect automatically, you can unblock them by asking them to follow these steps: + +1. In the **Microsoft Dynamics** add-in pane in Excel, choose **Add server information**. If you don't see it, choose the ![More option button in Excel.](media/cogwheel.png) icon at the top to open the options dialog. +2. For [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online, set **Server URL** to `https://exceladdinprovider.smb.dynamics.com`. For [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises, set it the URL of the web client, like `https://myBCserver/190`. +3. Choose **OK**, and then confirm that the app reloads. +4. When prompted, sign in with your Business Central user name and password. +5. Optionally, choose the environment and company that you want to connect to. + +The add-in is now connected to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\, and you can edit data and publish the changes to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. + +## Prepare devices and network for the Excel Add-In + +Network services such as proxies or firewalls must allow routing between each client device on which the add-In is installed and many service endpoints. For a list of endpoints, see [Preparing your network for the Excel Add-In](/dev-itpro/administration/configuring-network-for-addins). + +## Troubleshooting + +Sometimes, users run into problems with the Excel add-in. This section gives some tips for how to unblock users in certain circumstances. + +|Issue |Solution or workaround |Comments | +|---------|---------|---------| +|The add-in doesn't start|Check whether the add-in is deployed centrally. Or, check whether the user is blocked from installing it locally. | The admin can configure Office so that users can't acquire add-ins. In those cases, the admin must deploy the add-in centrally. For more information, see [Deploy add-ins in the admin center](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/manage-deployment-of-add-ins?view=o365-worldwide&preserve-view=true).| +|Data doesn't load into Excel|Test the connection by opening another list in Excel from [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. Or, open the workbook in Excel in a browser.|If the user has specified a company name that contains special characters, the add-in can't connect. | +|Data can't publish back to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\.|Test the connection by opening the workbook in Excel in a browser. |Sometimes an extension can block the publishing job. If the page is extended or customized, remove the extensions, and then try again.| +|The dates are wrong |Excel might show times and dates in a different format than [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\. This condition doesn't make them wrong, and the data in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]\ won't get messed up.| | +|For some list pages, editing multiple lines in Excel consistently causes errors. This condition can occur if OData calls include FlowFields and fields outside of the repeater control.|On the **Web Services** page, select the **Exclude Non-Editable FlowFields** and **Exclude Fields Outside of the Repeater** check boxes for the published page. Selecting these check boxes excludes non-editable FlowFields and field from the eTag calculation. |These check boxes are hidden by default. To show them on the **Web Services** page, use [personalization](/dynamics365/business-central/ui-personalization-user). | + + + + + +## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/modules/configure-powerbi-excel-dynamics-365-business-central/index) + +## See Also + +[Analyzing Financial Statements in Microsoft Excel](finance-analyze-excel.md) +[Working with Business Central](ui-work-product.md) +[Enhancements to Excel integration in 2019 release wave 2](/dynamics365-release-plan/2019wave2/dynamics365-business-central/enhancements-excel-integration) + + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/admin-gather-customer-setup-values.md b/business-central/admin-gather-customer-setup-values.md index 55fbf85f4..a22b3a523 100644 --- a/business-central/admin-gather-customer-setup-values.md +++ b/business-central/admin-gather-customer-setup-values.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ You can use a questionnaire to help you determine the scope and needs of configu You can create questionnaires for setup-type tables only. For example you can use the tool to provide information to the following pages: @@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ You can use a questionnaire to help you determine the scope and needs of configu - Warehouse Setup > [!NOTE] -> To see a complete list of setup tables, choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Setup**, and then choose the related link. To determine the scope of migration of records data, use migration functionality. For more information, see [Migrating Customer Data](admin-migrate-customer-data.md). +> To see a complete list of setup tables, choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Setup**, and then choose the related link. To determine the scope of migration of records data, use migration functionality. For more information, see [Migrating Customer Data](admin-migrate-customer-data.md). -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Configuration Questionnaire**, and choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Configuration Questionnaire**, and choose the related link. 2. Choose the **New** action. 3. On the **Configuration Questionnaire** page, in the **Code** field, enter... +## Customize the Match-Based Coupling + +Starting in 2021 release wave 2, you can couple records in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] based on matching criteria defined by the administrator. + +The algorithm for matching records can be started from the following places in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]: + +* List pages that show records that are synchronized with [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)], such as the Customers and Items pages. + + Select multiple records, and then choose the **Related** action, choose **Dataverse**, choose **Coupling**, and then choose **Match-Based Coupling**. + + When the match-based coupling process is started from a master data list, a coupling job will be scheduled right after you have selected the coupling criteria. +* The **Dataverse Full Synch. Review** page. + + When the full synchronization process detects that you have uncoupled records both in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and in [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)], a **Select Coupling Criteria** link appears for the relevant integration table. + + You can start the **Run Full Synchronization** process from the **Dataverse Connection Setup** and **Dynamics 365 Connection Setup** pages, and it can be initiated as a step in the **Set up a connection to Dataverse** assisted setup guide when you choose to complete setup and run full synchronization at the end. + + When the match-based coupling process is started from **Dataverse Full Synch. Review** page, a coupling job will be scheduled right after you completed the setup. +* The **Integration Table Mappings** list. + + Select a mapping, choose the **Coupling** action, and then choose **Match-Based Coupling**. + + When the match-based coupling process is started from an integration table mapping, a coupling job will run for all uncoupled records in that mapping. If it was run for a set of selected records from the list, it will run only for the selected uncoupled records. + +In all three cases, the **Select Coupling Criteria** page opens so that you can define the relevant coupling criteria. In this page, customize the coupling with the following tasks: + +* Choose which fields to match [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] records and [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] entities by, and also choose whether the match on that field will be case-sensitive or not. + +* Specify whether to run a synchronization after coupling records, and, if the record uses bidirectional mapping, also choose what happens if conflicts are listed in the **Resolve Update Conflicts** page. + +* Prioritize the order in which records are searched by specifying a *match priority* for the relevant mapping fields. The match priorities make the algorithm search for a match in a number of iterations as defined by the **Match Priority** field values in ascending order. A blank value in the **Match Priority** field is interpreted as priority 0, so fields with this value fill be considered first. + +* Specify whether to create a new entity instance in [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] in case no unique uncoupled match can be found by using the match criteria. To activate this capability, choose the **Create New if Unable to Find a Match** action. + +### View the results of the coupling job + +To view the results of the coupling job, open the **Integration Table Mappings** page, select the relevant mapping, choose the **Coupling** action, and then choose the **Integration Coupling Job Log** action. + +If there are any records that were not coupled, you can drill down on the value in the Failed column, which will open a list of errors that specifies why the records failed to couple. + +Failed coupling often happens in the following cases: + +* No matching criteria was defined + + In this case, run the match-based coupling again, but remember to define coupling criteria. + +* No match was found for a number of records, based on the chosen matching fields + + In this case, repeat the coupling with some other matching fields. + +* Multiple matches were found for a number of records, based on the chosen matching fields + + In this case, repeat the coupling with some other matching fields. + +* A single match was found, but the matching record is already coupled to another record in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] + + In this case, repeat the coupling with some other matching fields, or investigate why that [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] entity is coupled to that other record in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +> [!TIP] +> To help you get an overview over the progress of the coupling, the **Coupled to Dataverse** field shows whether a specific record is coupled to a [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] entity or not. You can filter the list of records that are being synchronized with [!INCLUDE [cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] by this field. + ## Upgrade Connections from Business Central Online to Use Certificate-Based Authentication > [!NOTE] -> This section is relevant only for Business Central online tenants that are hosted by Microsoft. Online tenants hosted by ISVs, and on-premises installations, are not affected. +> This section is relevant only for [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online tenants that are hosted by Microsoft. Online tenants hosted by ISVs, and on-premises installations, are not affected. In April, 2022, [!INCLUDE[cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)] is deprecating the Office365 authentication type (username/password). For more information, see [Deprecation of Office365 authentication type](/power-platform/important-changes-coming#deprecation-of-office365-authentication-type-and-organizationserviceproxy-class-for-connecting-to-dataverse). Additionally, in March, 2022, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is deprecating the use of client secret based service-to-service authentication for online tenants, and will require the use of certificate-based service-to-service authentication for connections to [!INCLUDE[cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)]. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online tenants that are hosted by ISVs, and on-premises installations, can continue to use client secret authentication to connect to [!INCLUDE[cds_long_md](includes/cds_long_md.md)]. @@ -176,4 +237,4 @@ The following steps assume that you use Azure AD to manage identities and access [View the Status of a Synchronization](admin-how-to-view-synchronization-status.md) -[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/admin-onedrive-faq.md b/business-central/admin-onedrive-faq.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..484e68d96 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/admin-onedrive-faq.md @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +--- +title: OneDrive for Business FAQ +description: Get answers for some typical questions about working with OneDrive for Business and Business Central. +author: bholtorf +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: get-started-article +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: OneDrive, integration, share, browser +ms.date: 05/19/2021 +ms.author: bholtorf +--- +# OneDrive for Business FAQ + +[!INCLUDE [online_only](includes/online_only.md)] + +This article answers some of the questions you may have about working with OneDrive and [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +## Does this work with all [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] clients? + +Yes. You can open files in OneDrive from the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] mobile apps, when viewing card details in Microsoft Teams, or even from the Outlook add-in. + +## Is OneDrive the same as SharePoint for storing files? + +As part of your Microsoft 365 subscription, your organization provides you with OneDrive, your file storage in the cloud. OneDrive is private by default, where you organize your content and choose which files or folders to share and with whom. SharePoint on the other hand, provides a file repository in the cloud that is shared with others in your organization. + +## Does [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] support consumer OneDrive? + +No. This integration is exclusively intended for OneDrive for Business and only supports your work account. + +## Are all OneDrive for Business plans supported? + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not support standalone plans for OneDrive for Business. OneDrive must be purchased as part of a Microsoft 365 business or enterprise plan. For more information, see [Compare OneDrive cloud storage pricing and plans](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/onedrive/compare-onedrive-plans?market=af&activetab=tab:primaryr2). + +## Where can I see OneDrive service health? + +Administrators can access the Service health dashboard as part of the Microsoft 365 admin center. The dashboard includes OneDrive’s service availability. + +## Is OneDrive integration available to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on premises? + +Yes, but unlike [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online, it does require additional setup. For more information, see [Configuring Business Central On-Premises](admin-onedrive-integration.md#configuring-business-central-on-premises). + +## Does [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on premises connect with SharePoint Server? + +No. This deployment combination is not supported, even if SharePoint Server has enabled My Sites. + +## Does [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online connect with SharePoint Server? + +No. This deployment combination is not supported, even if SharePoint Server has enabled My Sites. + +## How does this work in an organization with multiple environments? + +The integration assumes that company names are unique across [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] environments. When company names are unique across the organization, opening a file in OneDrive will copy the file to a folder named after the current company. If company names are not unique across environments, files may from identical company names will be placed together in the same folder. + +## We’ve changed company name. What happens to my previous files? + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not automatically migrate files you opened earlier in OneDrive to the new folder. After renaming your company, the Open in OneDrive action will copy files to a folder that has the new company name. + +## When attaching files to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], how do I pick a file from OneDrive? +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not provide a cloud file picker. You must download the file from OneDrive to your device, and then upload it to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +## I want to open files in SharePoint instead. How do I do this? + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not provide features to copy files to SharePoint and open them from a SharePoint library. Contact your Microsoft partner to understand your options, or search for apps on AppSource. + +## How do I turn off integration to OneDrive? + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online does not provide a way to enable or disable integration to OneDrive. + +## Should I use the SharePoint Connection Setup page to connect to SharePoint? + +This is a legacy feature where all [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] files from all users are sent to a single SharePoint folder. We recommend that you do not configure the Shared Documents FastTab on the SharePoint Connection Setup page because we are working toward deprecating this feature. + +## Which version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] supports OneDrive? + +Integration with OneDrive became available in 2021 release wave 2. + +## Will Microsoft continue to improve the integration to OneDrive? + +At Microsoft, we're constantly listening to feedback from our diverse user community and acting upon the top suggestions. To learn about what's next for integrations with Microsoft 365 apps, see the [Dynamics 365 release plan](/dynamics365-release-plan/2021wave1). + +If you want to participate in improving OneDrive integration, or have an idea that would improve file sharing and collaboration in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], add an idea or vote for existing ideas at [https://aka.ms/BusinessCentralIdeas](https://aka.ms/BusinessCentralIdeas). + +## Troubleshooting + +This section provides information about how to identify and fix problems you might experience when using OneDrive with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +### I have to sign in each time I open a file + +Sorry, that's a known issue and we're working on it. We expect to provide a smoother experience in an upcoming update. + +### Business Central can't find my OneDrive + +When this message displays, “Could not determine the location of your OneDrive for Business, contact your partner to set this up.”, check whether the user has accessed their OneDrive at least one time. If they haven't, ask the person to go to portal.office.com/onedrive to set it up. That can take a while. If the message still displays after 24 hours, contact Support. + + +## See Also +[Business Central and OneDrive Integration](across-onedrive-overview.md) +[Managing OneDrive Integration with Business Central](admin-onedrive-integration.md) +[Opening Business Central Files in OneDrive](across-share-onedrive.md) diff --git a/business-central/admin-onedrive-integration.md b/business-central/admin-onedrive-integration.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1a28613c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/admin-onedrive-integration.md @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +--- +title: Managing OneDrive Integration with Business Central +description: Learn about things you can do to manage an integration between Business Central and OneDrive for Business. +author: bholtorf +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: OneDrive, share, browser +ms.date: 05/12/2021 +ms.author: bholtorf +--- +# Managing OneDrive Integration with Business Central +This article provides an overview of what an administrator can do to control OneDrive for Business integration with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online customers benefit from automatic integration, with no additional setup required to use these features. + +## Minimum Requirements + +* Each user must have a license for [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and OneDrive as part of a Microsoft 365 plan. +* OneDrive must be set up for each user. + +## Governance +The SharePoint admin center provides extensive control over policies that govern the use of OneDrive throughout the organization. Global Admins, or users who have the SharePoint Admin role, can set up policies that determine who can access OneDrive, where data resides, the content lifecycle, and much more. The following links provide information about often-used features and settings that may enhance your integration with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +* [Manage sharing settings](/sharepoint/turn-external-sharing-on-or-off) +* [Use information barriers with SharePoint](/sharepoint/information-barriers) +* [Learn about data loss prevention](/microsoft-365/compliance/dlp-learn-about-dlp) +* [Set the default storage space for OneDrive users](/onedrive/set-default-storage-space) +* [Add and remove admins for a user's OneDrive](/sharepoint/manage-user-profiles#add-and-remove-admins-for-a-users-onedrive) +* [Disable OneDrive creation for some users](/sharepoint/manage-user-profiles#disable-onedrive-creation-for-some-users) +* [Multi-Geo Capabilities in OneDrive and SharePoint Online](/microsoft-365/enterprise/multi-geo-capabilities-in-onedrive-and-sharepoint-online-in-microsoft-365) + +> [!NOTE] +> Some features may be available only for specific plans. + +## Managing Privacy +Administrators and end users control the content stored in OneDrive, and this data is owned solely by your organization. For more information, see [How SharePoint and OneDrive safeguard your data in the cloud](/sharepoint/safeguarding-your-data). You can also visit our [Microsoft Privacy Statement](https://privacy.microsoft.com/en-us/privacystatement), which explains the data that Microsoft processes, how Microsoft processes it, and for what purposes. + +## Restoring OneDrive and [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] +As part of a disaster recovery exercise, administrators might need to restore a [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] environment to a backup from a time in the past, and synchronize OneDrive storage to that same point in time. OneDrive provides various tools for this, such as restoring a user’s OneDrive to a previous time, restore a previous version of an individual file, or restore deleted files. For more information, see the following topics: + +* For [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], see [Restoring an Environment in the Admin Center](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/tenant-admin-center-backup-restore). +* For OneDrive, see [Restore your OneDrive](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/restore-your-onedrive-fa231298-759d-41cf-bcd0-25ac53eb8a15?ui=en-us&rs=en-us&ad=us) + +## Configuring Business Central On-Premises +An administrator must set up the connection between [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on premises and OneDrive. Unlike [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online, the connection is not automatic. If the connection is not configured, users will not be able to use the features for OneDrive. + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on premises can only be connected to OneDrive hosted by Microsoft in the cloud. Connecting [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on premises to the My Sites repository of SharePoint Server is not supported. + +> [!IMPORTANT] +> By configuring this feature, you also enable legacy features that send files to OneDrive. +> +>* The Open in Excel feature will automatically copy the Excel file to OneDrive, then open it in Excel Online. +>* Exporting any report to a file will automatically copy the file to OneDrive, then open it in Excel Online, Word Online or OneDrive. +>* Other features may also automatically open in OneDrive. + +### To prepare [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises for connecting to OneDrive +Configure **Azure Active Directory Applications**. For more information, see [Authenticating Business Central Users with Azure Active Directory](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/authenticating-users-with-azure-active-directory). + +> [!TIP] +> If you have already registered an application as part of an integration with another Microsoft product, such as Power BI, then you can reuse that app registration. + +The most important parts of the application registration are the client ID and client secret. You use those when you set up the connection to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +### To set up the connection in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises +> [!NOTE] +> This requires the following types of authentication credentials: +> +> * Windows +> * NavUserPassword +> * Azure Active Directory + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Microsoft SharePoint Connection Setup**, and then choose the related link. +2. In the **Description** field, choose **OneDrive**. +3. In the **Folder** field, choose **Business Central**. +4. In the **Location** field, enter the URL for your OneDrive. +5. In the **Client ID** field, enter the client ID from your application registration. +6. In the **Client Secret** field, enter the secret from your application registration. + +> [!IMPORTANT] +> The SharePoint Connection Setup page is used to configure multiple legacy features. The **General** section configures the connection to OneDrive, and the **Shared Documents** section redirects files to SharePoint instead. The legacy SharePoint feature will be deprecated in the near future. We recommend that you do not configure the **Shared Documents** section. + +## See Also +[Business Central and OneDrive for Business Integration](across-onedrive-overview.md) +[Opening Business Central Files in OneDrive](across-share-onedrive.md) +[OneDrive FAQ](admin-onedrive-faq.md) + diff --git a/business-central/admin-outlook.md b/business-central/admin-outlook.md index f9c259c40..d221a02fc 100644 --- a/business-central/admin-outlook.md +++ b/business-central/admin-outlook.md @@ -1,70 +1,118 @@ --- -title: Using Business Central with Outlook| Microsoft Docs -description: This service has deep integration with Microsoft 365 enabling you to manage all your business interactions and mail with customers and vendors directly in Outlook. -author: edupont04 - +title: Get the Business Central Add-in for Outlook +description: Learn how to install the Business Central add-in for Outlook for your organization or for your own use. +author: jswymer ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365 -ms.date: 04/01/2021 -ms.author: edupont +ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365, Outlook +ms.date: 08/13/2021 +ms.author: jswymer --- -# Using Business Central as your Business Inbox in Outlook +# Get the Business Central Add-in for Outlook + +With [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], you can manage business interactions with your customers and vendors, directly in Microsoft Outlook. With the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] Outlook add-in, you can see financial data related to customers and vendors. You can also create and send financial documents, such as quotes and invoices. + +There are two ways to get the Business Central add-in for Outlook installed, depending on your role in the organization: + +- As a Microsoft 365 administrator, use *Centralized Deployment* to install the add-in automatically for the entire organization, groups, or specific users. + +- As any user, install the add-in for your own use, if your admin hasn't already deployed it for you. + +## About the Business Central add-in for Outlook + +The Business Central add-in for Outlook consists of two smaller add-ins: + +- Contact insights + + This add-in provides users with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] customer or vendor information in Outlook emails and calendar appointments. It also enables you to create and send [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] business documents, such sales quotes and invoices to a contact. -[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] introduces the ability to manage business interactions with your customers and vendors, directly in Microsoft Outlook. With the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] Outlook add-ins, you can see financial data related to customers and vendors, as well as create and send financial documents, such as quotes and invoices. +- Document view -## Getting the Add-in -It is easy to get started with the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in for Outlook. In the **Set up your Business Inbox in Outlook** assisted setup guide, you can set up the connection for yourself or for your organization if your organization uses Microsoft 365. Simply specify your Microsoft 365 user name and password, if you are prompted, and tell us if you want to receive a sample email message. The [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-ins are then automatically added to your Outlook. For more information, see [Minimum Requirements for Outlook](product-requirements.md#outlook). + When an email refers to a business document number in the email body, this add-in provides a direct, in-line link from email body to the actual business document in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. -Then, when you open Outlook, you will see an email message from *Dynamics 365 Business Central Admin*. The new add-ins are added to the Outlook ribbon, and in the browser, you can see the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-ins immediately above or below the body of the email message. The add-ins are updated periodically, and you'll get notified that a new version is ready for you in Outlook. +For more information about what you do with the add-ins, see [Using Business Central as your Business Inbox in Outlook](work-outlook-addin.md). -> [!TIP] -> If you use the new Outlook on the web, then the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-ins can be hidden under **More actions**. If you use the add-in often, you can pin it so that it is always immediately visible. For more information, see [Using add-ins in Outlook on the web](https://support.office.com/article/using-add-ins-in-outlook-on-the-web-8f2ce816-5df4-44a5-958c-f7f9d6dabdce?ns=OLWAO365B&version=16). +Each add-in is provided as an XML file, called a *manifest*, which must be installed in Outlook of anyone who wants this functionality. These files describe how to activate the add-ins and connect to Business Central when they're used in Outlook. Working with these files is typically done by an admin. As a normal user, in most cases, you won't have to handle with these files directly. Either your admin will set up the add-in to install automatically for you or you'll use the built-in assisted setup to handle the installation. -If you work with more that one [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] company, you can easily switch between companies in Outlook. In the add-in's action bar, choose **More Actions**, and then you can see the option for switching between companies. +## Deploy the add-in by using Centralized Deployment as an admin + +Centralized Deployment is a feature in Microsoft 365 admin center that you use to automatically install add-ins in users' Office apps, like Outlook. It's the recommended way for admins to deploy for Office add-ins to users and groups within your organization. - > [!NOTE] -> Switching between companies requires [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] 2019 release wave 2 or later as announced in the [release plan](/dynamics365-release-plan/2019wave2/dynamics365-business-central/switch-between-companies-business-inbox-outlook). +> For Business Central on-premises, see [Setting Up the Add-In for Outlook Integration with Business Central On-Premises](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/setting-up-office-add-ins-outlook-inbox) in the administration content (English only). + +### Prerequisites + +- A Microsoft 365 subscription +- Users are assigned a Microsoft 365 license +- Your Microsoft 365 account has the *Global Administrator* or *Exchange Administrator* role + +### Deploy the add-in + +1. In Business Central, choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Assisted Setup**, and then choose the related link. +2. Choose **Outlook Add-in Centralized Deployment** to start the assisted setup guide. +3. Review the first page and choose **Next** to open the page for downloading the add-ins. +4. In the **Deploy** column, select the check box for the add-ins that you want to deploy, then choose **Download and Continue**. + + A file with the name *OutlookAddins.zip* is downloaded to your device. + +5. At this point, you're finished with the work you need to do in Business Central, so you can choose **Done**. + + >[!TIP] + > Before you choose **Next**, select the **Go to Microsoft 365 (opens in a new window)** link to open and sign in to the Microsoft 365 admin center in a new browser window. You'll have to go to the Microsoft 365 admin center in a later step anyways. + +6. Go the folder where the OutlookAddins.zip was downloaded, and extract the **Contact Insights.xml** and **Document View.xml** files from the .zip to a folder of your choice. -Some companies using Microsoft 365 restrict users' permissions to deploy add-ins. So you must make sure that you have a Microsoft 365 subscription that includes email and allows you to deploy add-ins. If you want to try out the add-in anyway, you can [try Microsoft 365 for free](https://www.microsoft.com/microsoft-365/try). + For more information, see [Zip and Unzip files and folders](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/zip-and-unzip-files-8d28fa72-f2f9-712f-67df-f80cf89fd4e5). +7. Sign in to the Microsoft 365 admin center, then go to [Integrated Apps](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2163967). -## Using the Contact Insights Add-in -Let's say that you get an email from a customer that wants to get a quote on some items. Directly in Outlook, you can open the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in, which recognizes the sender as a customer, and opens the customer card for that company. From this dashboard, you can see overview information for the customer, as well as drill down for more detail on specific documents. You can also dig into the sales history for the customer. If it's a new contact, you can create them as a new customer in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] without leaving Outlook. +8. Choose **Upload custom apps**. +9. On the **Upload Apps to deploy** page, choose **Upload manifest file (.xml) from device** > **Choose file**. +10. Select one of the add-files you extracted earlier, for example, **Content Insights.xml**. +11. Follow the instructions to assign users and deploy the add-in. +12. Repeat step 9 through 11 for the other add-in file if you want. -In the add-in, you can create a sales quote and send it back to this customer without leaving Outlook. All of the information that you need to send the sales quote is available in your business inbox in Outlook. -Once you have the data entered, you can post the quote. You can then send it by email. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] generates a .PDF file with the sales quote and attaches it to the email message that you draft in the add-in. +> [!IMPORTANT] +> A green check mark appears when the add-in is deployed to the admin center. However, it can take up to 24 hours before users see the add-in in Outlook app. Users might have to restart Outlook as well. -Similarly, if you get an email from a vendor, you can use the add-in to work with vendors and purchase invoices. +When finished, you can always change the deployment in Microsoft 365 admin center, like assigning more users. For more information about deploying add-ins in the admin center, see [Deploy add-ins in the admin center](/microsoft-365/admin/manage/manage-deployment-of-add-in). -Sometimes you want to see more fields than you can see in the add-in, such as when you want to fill in lines in an invoice. To give you a bit more space to work with, you can pop out the add-in to a separate page. It's still part of Outlook, but you have more space. As you enter data for the document in the pop-out view, the changes are automatically saved. When you are done entering data for the document, you can choose the **OK** button. Choosing the add-in frame in Outlook automatically refreshes the document with the changes you made in the pop-out view. +## Install the add-in for your own use -## Creating Invoices from Your Meeting Appointments -Some businesses record all billable appointments in the Outlook calendar. With [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], you can create the invoice for the customer right from the calendar item: Open the appointment, and then you can open the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in, look up existing information or create an invoice or another sales document right there. +If your organization allows it, you can install the Business Central add-in for just yourself. Contact your administrator if you're not sure. -## Doing Quick Document Lookup -The [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] Document Links add-in gives you quick access to documents mentioned in email messages. The add-in is available for an email message if a document number is recognized in the body of the message. Opening the add-in provides quick access to the document. +1. In Business Central, go to the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Get the Outlook Add-in**, then choose the related link. +2. Read the page and choose **Next** when ready. +3. If you want to receive a welcome email message from Business Central with overview of using the add-in, turn on **Send sample email message**. +4. Choose **Finish** to complete the installation. -For example, if you receive an email message that mentions the text *S-QUO100*, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] identifies that as a sales quote, and so you can open this document in Outlook. In Outlook, choose the **Document Links** button immediately above the body of the email message. In the Outlook Web App, choose the *S-QUO1001* text in the body of the email message. +Business Central will connect to your email server and install the add-in in your Outlook. This won't take long. You're now ready to start using the add-in in Outlook. -In the Document Links add-in, you can modify and take actions with the document, just like you can in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +### For Business Central on-premises -## Adding the Add-ins Manually -In some cases, the add-ins do not get added automatically to Outlook. Even if you or a colleague ran the assisted setup guide on behalf of the company, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] might not show up in Outlook. If you experience this issue, you can add the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-ins manually. +If you're using Business Central on-premises, installing the add-in may be slightly different. -First, you must verify that you have access to the add-ins in your Microsoft 365 account. Quite simply open your Outlook in a browser, open a message, select **More actions** (...) at the top of the message, and then, at the bottom of the list, choose **Get Add-ins**. This opens the **Add-ins for Outlook** page, where you can enable [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] for your Outlook. Then, when you navigate back to Outlook, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] should be available. +1. In Business Central, go to the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Get the Outlook Add-in**, then choose the related link. +2. Read the page and choose **Next** when ready. +3. Do one of the following steps, depending on the page you see: -Similarly in the Outlook desktop client, you can verify that [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is listed on the **Get Add-ins** page. + - If you see the **Install to my Outlook** button, choose it and you're all done. + - If you see the **Next** button, choose it. On the next page, if you want to receive a welcome email message from Business Central with overview of using the add-in, turn on **Send sample email message**. Then, choose **Finish** and you're all done. + - If you see the **Download Add-in** button, choose it, then go to the next step. +4. When you choose **Download Add-in**, a file with the name *OutlookAddins.zip* is downloaded to your device. You should see the file at the top of the browser. -In both cases, if [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is still not available, you have to get the add-in manifest files. For more information, please contact your Microsoft 365 administrator. + Go the folder where the OutlookAddins.zip was downloaded, and extract the **Contact Insights.xml** and **Document View.xml** file from the .zip to a folder of your choice. For more information about how to extract files, see [Zip and Unzip files and folders](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/zip-and-unzip-files-8d28fa72-f2f9-712f-67df-f80cf89fd4e5). -## Using Other Email Accounts +5. Open Outlook, and choose **Get Add-ins** from the ribbon. Or, if you're using Outlook on the web, select the drop-down menu on any new or existing email message, then select **Get Add-ins**. +6. Choose **My add-ins** > **Add a custom add-in** > **Add from a file**. +7. Choose one of the .xml files that you extracted, like **Contact Insights.xml**, then choose **Open** > **Install**. +8. Repeat step 6 and 7 for the other .xml file, if you downloaded one. -The add-ins are designed to be used with Microsoft 365. If you use [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises, your administrator will know if you can use the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-ins in Outlook. For more information, see [What email address can I use with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#email), and the [Features that require specific circumstances](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/features-not-implemented-on-premises#features-that-require-specific-circumstances?toc=/dynamics365/business-central/toc.json) article and the [Why doesn't the Outlook add-in work for my users?](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/faq#why-doesnt-the-outlook-add-in-work-for-my-users?toc=/dynamics365/business-central/toc.json) section in the general FAQ in the administration content. +You're now ready to start using the add-in in Outlook. ## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/modules/alternative-interfaces-dynamics-365-business-central/index) diff --git a/business-central/across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md b/business-central/admin-sandbox-environments.md similarity index 97% rename from business-central/across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md rename to business-central/admin-sandbox-environments.md index 5e044dde8..ec370ca84 100644 --- a/business-central/across-how-create-sandbox-environment.md +++ b/business-central/admin-sandbox-environments.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Sandbox environments -description: Learn about how a dedicate environment can help you safely explore, learn, demo, develop, troubleshoot, and test Business Central. +description: Learn about how a dedicated environment can help you safely explore, learn, demo, develop, troubleshoot, and test Business Central. author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen ms.service: dynamics365-business-central diff --git a/business-central/admin-teams-integration.md b/business-central/admin-teams-integration.md index e7906d480..634a13977 100644 --- a/business-central/admin-teams-integration.md +++ b/business-central/admin-teams-integration.md @@ -32,8 +32,10 @@ This section describes the minimum requirements for the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](i |----|---|---| |Search for [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] contacts.|![check mark.](media/check.png "check")|![check mark](media/check.png "check")| |Paste a link to a [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] record into a conversation, and send it as a card.|![check mark](media/check.png "check")|![check mark](media/check.png "check")| + |Share a link from a page in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to Teams conversation.|![check mark](media/check.png "check")|![check mark](media/check.png "check")| |View a card of a [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] record in a conversation.|![check mark](media/check.png "check")|| |View more details of card for a [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] record in a conversation.|![check mark](media/check.png "check")|![check mark](media/check.png "check")| + |Open a page link in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] from a conversation.|![check mark](media/check.png "check")|![check mark](media/check.png "check")| - Allow URL previews @@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ For more information, see the following articles in the Microsoft Teams document - User permissions: For the most part, the contact search, pages, and data that users can view and edit in a Teams conversation is controlled by their permissions in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. - + - To search for contacts, users must have at least read permission to the **Contacts** table. - To paste a [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] link into a Teams conversation and have it expand into a card, users must have at least read permission on the page and its data. - Once a card is submitted into a conversation, any user in that conversation can view that card without permission to [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. @@ -72,11 +74,35 @@ For more information, see the following articles in the Microsoft Teams document For information about permissions, see [Assign Permissions to Users and Groups](ui-define-granular-permissions.md). +## Installing the Business Central app by using Centralized Deployment + +The Microsoft Teams admin center is where you configure Teams app setup policies for the organization. In the Teams admin center, you can use the Centralized Deployment feature to automatically install the Business Central app in Teams for all users in your organization, specific groups, or individual users. + +> [!NOTE] +> To set up Centralized Deployment, your Teams account must have the **Teams Service admin** role or the **Global admin** role. + +1. In Business Central, choose the ![Magnifying glass that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Teams App Centralized Deployment**, and then choose the related link. Or, select [here](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com/?page=1833) to open the page directly. +2. Read the information on the **Set up the Business Central app for Teams**, then choose **Next** when ready. +3. Open the [Teams admin center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=2163970), and complete the following steps. + 1. Go to **Teams apps** > **Setup policies**. + 2. Create a new policy or select the policy that you want to use to install the Business Central app, then select **Add apps**. + 3. In the **Add installed apps** page, search for and select **Business Central**. + 4. Choose **Add**. + + Business Central should now appear under **Installed apps** for the policy. + 5. Configure any additional settings, then choose **Save**. + + For more information about setup policies in Teams, see [Manage app setup policies in Microsoft Teams](/MicrosoftTeams/teams-app-setup-policies) in the Teams documentation. +4. Go back to **Teams App Centralized Deployment** in Business Central, and select **Done**. + +> [!IMPORTANT] +> It can take up to 24 hours for the app set up policy to be applied and the app deployed to users. + ## Managing privacy and compliance Microsoft Teams provides extensive controls for compliance and management of sensitive or personally identifiable data—including data added to chats and channels by the [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app. -### Understanding where [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] cards are stored +### Understanding where [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] cards are stored After a card is sent to a chat, the card and the fields shown on the card are copied to Teams. This information is subject to the Teams policies for your organization, such as data retention policies. When displaying card details, none of the data in the details window is stored in Teams. The data remains stored in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and will only be retrieved by Teams when the user chooses to view the details. diff --git a/business-central/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md b/business-central/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md index 5a41d1971..96a092ff2 100644 --- a/business-central/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md +++ b/business-central/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ --- title: Reconcile Bank Accounts -description: This describes how to perform bank reconciliation with the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page; how your inventory value is reconciled with the general ledger. -author: SorenGP +description: This topic describes how to reconcile the transactions in your internal bank accounts with the transactions in statements from your bank. +author: bholtorf ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: bank account balance, bank statement ms.date: 06/14/2021 -ms.author: edupont +ms.author: bholtorf --- # Reconcile Bank Accounts @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ The following describes how to perform bank reconciliation with the **Bank Acc. > You can also reconcile bank accounts on the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** page when you process payments. Any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied customer or vendor ledger entries will be closed when you choose the **Post Payments and Reconcile Bank Account** action. This automatically reconciles the bank account for the payments that you post with the journal. For more information, see [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md). > [!NOTE] -> In the North American versions, you can also perform this work on the **Bank Rec. Worksheet** page, which is better suited for checks and deposits but does not offer import of bank statement files. To use this page instead of the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page, deselect the **Bank Recon. with Auto. Match** field on the **General Ledger Setup** page. For more information, see [Reconciling Bank Accounts](LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) under United States Local Functionality. +> In the North American versions, you can also perform this work on the **Bank Rec. Worksheet** page, which is better suited for checks and deposits but does not offer import of bank statement files. To use this page instead of the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page, clear the **Bank Recon. with Auto. Match** field on the **General Ledger Setup** page. For more information, see [Reconciling Bank Accounts](LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) under United States Local Functionality. The lines on the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page are divided into two panes. The **Bank Statement Lines** pane shows either imported bank transactions or ledger entries with outstanding payments. The **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane shows the ledger entries in the internal bank account. @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Any lines that cannot be matched, indicated by a value in the **Difference** fie | Difference | Reason | Resolution | |------------|--------|------------| -| A transaction in the internal bank account is not on the bank statement. | The bank transaction did not occur although a posting was made in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. | Make the missing money transaction (or prompt a debitor to make it), and then reimport the bank statement file or enter the transaction manually. | +| A transaction in the internal bank account is not on the bank statement. | The bank transaction did not occur although a posting was made in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. | Make the missing money transaction (or prompt a debitor to make it), and then re-import the bank statement file or enter the transaction manually. | | A transaction on the bank statement does not exist as a document or journal line in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. | A bank transaction was made without a corresponding posting in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], for example a journal line posting for an expense. | Create and post the missing entry. For information on a quick way to initiate this, see [To create missing ledger entries to match bank transactions with](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md#to-create-missing-ledger-entries-to-match-bank-statement-lines-with). | | A transaction in the internal bank account corresponds to a bank transaction but some information is too different to give a match. | Information, such as the amount or the customer name, was entered differently in connection with the bank transaction or the internal posting. | Review the information, and then manually match the two. Optionally, correct the information mismatch. | @@ -73,31 +73,44 @@ The **Bank Statement Lines** pane will be filled according to invoices in [!INCL 1. On the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page, choose the **Suggest Lines** action. 2. In the **Starting Date** field, enter the earliest posting date for the ledger entries to be reconciled. 3. In the **Ending Date** field, enter the latest posting date for the ledger entries to be reconciled. -4. Select the **Include Checks** check box to any suggest check ledger entries instead of the corresponding bank account ledger entries. -5. Choose the **OK** button. + +> [!NOTE] +> Typically, the ending date will match the date specified in the **Statement Date** field. However, if you want to reconcile transactions for only part of a period, you can enter a different ending date. + +1. Select the **Include Checks** check box to any suggest check ledger entries instead of the corresponding bank account ledger entries. +1. Choose the **OK** button. ## To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries automatically The **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page offers automatic matching functionality based on a matching of text on a bank statement line (left pane) with text on one or more bank account ledger entries (right pane). Note that you can overwrite the suggested automatic matching, and you can choose to not use automatic matching at all. For more information, see [To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries manually](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md#to-match-bank-statement-lines-with-bank-account-ledger-entries-manually). +Auto-matching matches entries based on a set of payment application rules. For more information, see [Set Up Rules for Automatic Application of Payments](receivables-how-set-up-payment-application-rules.md). You can investigate the basis for matches by using the **Match Details** action. For example, the details will include the names of the fields that contained matching values. + 1. On the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page, choose the **Match Automatically**. **The Match Bank Entries** page opens. 2. In the **Transaction Date Tolerance (Days)** field, specify the span of days before and after the bank account ledger entry posting date within which the function will search for matching transaction dates in the bank statement. - If you enter 0 or leave the field blank, then the **Match Automatically** function will only search for matching transaction dates on the bank account ledger entry posting date. + If you enter 0 or leave the field blank, the **Match Automatically** action will only search for matching transaction dates on the bank account ledger entry posting date. 3. Choose the **OK** button. All bank statement lines and bank account ledger entries that can be matched change to green font, and the **Applied** check box is selected. 4. To remove a match, select the bank statement line, and then choose the **Remove Match** action. -## To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries manually +> [!TIP] +> You can use a mix of manual and automatic matching. If you have manually matched entries, automatic matching will not overwrite your selections. +## To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries manually 1. On the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** page, select a non-applied line in the **Bank Statement Lines** pane. -2. In the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane, select one or more banks account ledger entries that can be matched with the selected bank statement line. To choose multiple lines, press and hold the Ctrl key. +2. In the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane, select one or more banks account ledger entries that can be matched with the selected bank statement line. To choose multiple lines, press and hold the CTRL key. + + > [!TIP] + > You can also manually match multiple bank statement lines with one bank account ledger entry. For example, this might be useful if your bank deposit contained several payment methods, such as credit cards from different issuers, and your bank lists those as separate lines. 3. Choose the **Match Manually** action. The selected bank statement line and the selected bank account ledger entries change to green font, and the **Applied** check box in the right pane is selected. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all bank statement lines that are not matched. -5. To remove a match, select the bank statement line, and then choose the **Remove Match** action. + +> [!TIP] +> To remove a match, select the bank statement line, and then choose the **Remove Match** action. If you have matched multiple bank statement lines to a ledger entry, and need to remove one or more of the matched lines, all of the manual matches are removed for the ledger entry when you choose **Remove Match**. ## To create missing ledger entries to match bank statement lines with diff --git a/business-central/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md b/business-central/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md index 1611cc648..b569fe0a4 100644 --- a/business-central/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md +++ b/business-central/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md @@ -44,7 +44,10 @@ Once a month, or whenever you choose, you can run the **Calculate Depreciation** 5. Choose the **Post** action. > [!NOTE] -> If you select the **Use Force No. of Days** field, and the **Force No. of Days** field is set to a value that result in the posting date minus the value of the **Number of Days** fields is a date in the previous calendar year, you cannot post the depreciation. The workaround is to reduce the value of the **Force No. of Days** to no more than than the calculated days until posting date using 30 days/month OR select the **Fiscal Year 365 Days** field on the depreciation book. We recommend the first option as you may not want to change the use of 30 days/months for depreciation. For more information, see [Fiscal Year 365 Days Field Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md#fiscal-year-365-days-field-depreciation). +> Known limitation: If you set the **Use Force No. of Days** field to Yes, and the **Force No. of Days** field is set to a value where **Posting Date** minus **Number of Days** results in a date in the previous calendar year, the system will not let you post the depreciation. +> You can avoid it by reducing the **Force No. of Days** field to no more than than the calculated days until posting date using 30days/month OR set the flag **Fiscal Year 365 Days** in the Depreciation Book. +> We recommend the first option as you may not want to change the use of 30days/months for depreciation. For more information, see [Fiscal Year 365 Days Field Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md#fiscal-year-365-days-field-depreciation). + ## To post depreciation manually from the fixed asset G/L journal 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Fixed Asset G/L Journal**, and then choose the related link. diff --git a/business-central/finance-adjust-reconcile-inventory-cost-job-queue.md b/business-central/finance-adjust-reconcile-inventory-cost-job-queue.md index 7e00b4f1c..96709ca39 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-adjust-reconcile-inventory-cost-job-queue.md +++ b/business-central/finance-adjust-reconcile-inventory-cost-job-queue.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- -title: Adjust Reconcile Cost with G/L using Job Queue -description: Learn how you can use the job queue to move the tasks for adjusting inventory cost or reconciling it with the GL to the background. For example, if your company runs many tasks or processes many transactions. +title: Schedule Jobs for Adjusting & Reconciling Inventory Cost +description: Learn how you can use the job queue to move the tasks for adjusting inventory cost or reconciling it with the general ledger to the background. For example, if your company runs many tasks or processes many transactions. author: AndreiPanko ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -9,30 +9,31 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.reviewer: edupont -ms.date: 07/28/2021 +ms.date: 09/23/2021 ms.author: andreipa --- -# Adjust and Reconcile Inventory Cost with General Ledger with Job Queue +# Schedule Jobs for Adjusting and Reconciling Inventory Cost with the General Ledger To optimize the experience, automatic cost adjustment and posting to the general ledger are turned on by default. However, as data accumulates over time, that might impact performance. To reduce the load on the application, it is often helpful to use job queue entries to move tasks to run in the background. ## Move the task of adjusting item costs to the background with the help of assisted setup -Creating the job queue entries can be tricky, even for an experienced consultant, so we have an assisted setup guide to make the process easier for adjusting item costs. +Creating the job queue entries can be tricky, even for an experienced consultant, so we have an assisted setup guide to make the process easier for adjusting item costs. 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. On the **Inventory Setup** page, toggle the **Automatic Cost Posting** field, or specify **Never** in the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** field. -3. In the notification that now displays at the top of the page, choose the **Schedule Job Queue Entry** link. +3. In the notification that now displays at the top of the page, choose the **Schedule Job Queue Entry** link. This opens the **Schedule Cost Adjustment and Posting** assisted setup guide. 4. Specify the task that you want to schedule. > [!NOTE] - > You cannot create a new job queue entry if a job queue entry for the specified task already exists. + > You cannot create a new job queue entry if a job queue entry for the specified task already exists. + 5. Select the **View job queue entries when finished** field to review and adjust settings. For more information, see [Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md). ## To create a job queue entry for adjusting and reconciling inventory cost manually -Alternatively, you can create job queue entries manually. The following procedure shows how to set the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job to automatically run daily, but the same steps apply to the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job. +Alternatively, you can create job queue entries manually. The following procedure shows how to set the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job to automatically run daily, but the same steps apply to the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job. 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Job Queue Entries**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **New** action. @@ -46,9 +47,8 @@ Now, inventory cost will be updated every night. To schedule a task for reconciling inventory with the general ledger, choose Codeunit 2846 **Post Inventory Cost to G/L**. - -> [!NOTE] -> To avoid locking, do not schedule tasks for the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** codeunit, and tasks for posting sales or purchasing transactions at the same time, and make sure that they use same Job Queue Category. +> [!TIP] +> To avoid locking, do not schedule tasks for the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** codeunit, and tasks for posting sales or purchasing transactions at the same time. Also, make sure that they use same job queue category. ## See Also diff --git a/business-central/finance-general-ledger.md b/business-central/finance-general-ledger.md index b4145a021..95c571cce 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-general-ledger.md +++ b/business-central/finance-general-ledger.md @@ -67,6 +67,9 @@ For example, the default balance statement has a subcategory for *Cash* under *C The next time you generate account schedules, your balance statement will show a total balance for cash and two lines with balances for petty cash and the checking account. +## Getting a Quick Overview +The Chart of Accounts page displays accounts in a hierarchical list that offers fast access to the key information for each account. However, the list is static, and if you have a lot of accounts you might have to do a bit of scrolling to view information for different accounts. If you just want a quick overview of the basics, such as net changes and balances, the **Chart of Accounts Overview** page is a useful alternative. The column layout on the page is now the same as you’ll find on the Chart of Accounts page (there are just fewer of them), so you won’t have to reorient yourself, and you can expand or collapse the hierarchical levels to condense the view. To make it easy to switch between the pages, the **Chart of Accounts Overview** page is available from the Chart of Accounts page. + ## Access to create and edit accounts and account categories In a small organization, such as the CRONUS demonstration company, most users can edit the chart of accounts, except users with a TEAM MEMBER license. However, in larger organizations, access to edit the chart of accounts is limited by roles and permissions. If you are an administrator, or you have the *Business manager* or *Accountant* role, you can check the permissions for all users to make sure the right people have access to the relevant tables. For more information, see [To get an overview of a user's permissions](ui-define-granular-permissions.md#to-get-an-overview-of-a-users-permissions). diff --git a/business-central/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md b/business-central/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md index 859e7f7f6..f26180a36 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md +++ b/business-central/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md @@ -36,8 +36,9 @@ If you cannot use a document to reapply, such as when you have to correct a fixe - It is possible to remove applications from more than one entry at a time in the application worksheet. However, because applying entries affects the set of entries that are available for application, you cannot create an application for more than one entry at a time. - The application worksheet cannot make an application in the following situation: If there is not enough quantity on stock to apply, the application worksheet cannot make an application when you are trying to apply an inventory decrease entry without item tracking information to an inventory increase entry with item tracking information. -## To remove an item application by using the Application Worksheet -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. +## To remove an item application by using the Application Worksheet + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. 2. The **Application Worksheet** page opens displaying existing item ledger entries for all items. 3. Enter filters on the **General** FastTab to make it easier to find the item ledger entry for which you want to change the application. 4. Select the item ledger entry, and then choose the **Applied Entries** action. The **View Applied Entries – Applied Entries** page opens to show the item ledger entry or entries that are currently applied to the selected entry. @@ -50,10 +51,11 @@ If you cannot use a document to reapply, such as when you have to correct a fixe > [!IMPORTANT] > You should not leave application entries unapplied for longer periods of time because other users cannot process the affected items until you reapply the application entries or close the **Application Worksheet** page. The following error message is displayed if you try to perform actions that involve a manually unapplied application entry: > -> **You cannot perform this action because entries for item are unapplied in the Application Worksheet by user .** +> **You cannot perform this action because entries for item \ are unapplied in the Application Worksheet by user \.** + +## To reapply an item application by using the Application Worksheet -## To reapply an item application by using the Application Worksheet -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. 2. The **Application Worksheet** page opens displaying existing item ledger entries for all items. 3. To reapply entries that were removed since the worksheet was opened, select the item ledger entry that you want to reapply, and then choose the **Reapply** action. @@ -68,7 +70,8 @@ If you cannot use a document to reapply, such as when you have to correct a fixe > If you have chosen to make an application that would create an infinite loop in the cost adjustment process, then the application that you proposed is not made. This can occur when the original entries created negative stock. The application is not made. Therefore, you must select a different entry for the application. 6. If the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** field in the **Inventory Setup** is set to **Always**, then the cost adjustment batch job is automatically run after you make a reapplication. Otherwise, run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job to make sure that all costs are up to date. -## See Also +## See Also + [Close Open Item Ledger Entries Resulting from Fixed Application in the Item Journal](finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md) [Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md) [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) diff --git a/business-central/finance-posting-groups.md b/business-central/finance-posting-groups.md index 112527c36..28bff265e 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-posting-groups.md +++ b/business-central/finance-posting-groups.md @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ ms.author: bholtorf --- # Setting Up Posting Groups -Posting groups map entities like customers, vendors, items, resources, and sales and purchase documents to general ledger accounts. They save time and help avoid mistakes when you post transactions. The transaction values go to the accounts specified in the posting group for that particular entity. The only requirement is that you have a chart of accounts. For more information, see [Set Up the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md). +Posting groups map entities such as customers, vendors, items, resources, and sales and purchase documents to general ledger accounts. They save time and help avoid mistakes when you post transactions. The transaction values go to the accounts specified in the posting group for that particular entity. The only requirement is that you have a chart of accounts. For more information, see [Set Up the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md). Posting groups are covered under three umbrellas: @@ -71,6 +71,14 @@ Your setup determines when posting happens. For example, the timing is affected ## Copying posting setup lines The more product and business posting groups you have, the more lines you see in the General Posting Setup page. This can mean a lot of data entry to set up the general posting setup for the company. While there may be many different combinations of business and product posting groups, different combinations may still post to the same general ledger accounts. To limit the amount of manual entry, copy the general ledger accounts from an existing line on the **General Posting Setup** page. +## Troubleshooting posting group errors +Posting groups are one of the more advanced concepts to set up in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. If they aren't set up correctly, errors can occur when posting documents or journal lines. For example, these errors are typically caused by a mistake in how general ledger accounts are assigned, or how posting groups are combined. + +When something is wrong, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] will display the **Error Messages** page. The **Error Messages** page can make it easier to identify and resolve the issue. The page offers a description of the error that points out the posting group setup that needs attention. For example, the message might read "Sales Prepayment account is missing a General Posting Setup." There's also a link to open the page that's the source of the issue, so you can quickly resolve it. + +> [!NOTE] +> The error handling described above is not available on item, resource, employee, and fixed asset journals, or for G/L accounts added in local versions of posting groups. + ## See also [The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) [Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) diff --git a/business-central/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md b/business-central/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md index f98a15b7f..01098fbcb 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md +++ b/business-central/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ The chart of cost types is similar to the chart of accounts in the general ledge - Create new chart of cost types or add new cost types to existing chart of cost types. You must create each new cost type individually. ### To transfer the general ledger chart of accounts to the chart of cost types -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Types**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Types**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **Get Cost Types from Chart of Accounts** action. In the dialog box, choose the **Yes** button to confirm the transfer. The function uses the chart of accounts to create a chart of cost types. The chart of cost types now contain all income statement accounts in the general ledger and include headings and subtotals. You can change the chart of cost types, as necessary. For example, you can delete duplicate existing cost types. @@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ There is an n:1 relationship between general ledger accounts and cost types. Sev |------------------|------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------| |One general ledger account for each cost type|One general ledger account|One cost type| |Several general ledger accounts for one cost type|General ledger account range, for example, 7110..7193 for each general ledger account|For each general ledger account in the range, there is only one cost type| -|Cost types without corresponding general ledger accounts||| -|General ledger accounts whose entries will not be transferred||| +|Cost types without corresponding general ledger accounts|\|| +|General ledger accounts whose entries will not be transferred||\| ### Cost Types Without a Relationship to the General Ledger A cost type may not have a relationship to general ledger accounts if one of the following conditions is true: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Cost centers are departments that are responsible for costs and income. The char ### To transfer dimension values in the general ledger to the chart of cost centers 1. Set up a dimension to be the cost center dimension on the **Update Cost Acctg. Dimensions** page. Only the values from this dimension are transferred. -2. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Centers**, and then choose the related link. +2. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Centers**, and then choose the related link. 3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Get Cost Centers from Dimension** to transfer dimension values to the chart of cost centers. The function transfers the dimension values that you defined in step 1. > [!NOTE] @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Cost objects are projects, products, or services of a company. The chart of cost ### To transfer dimension values from the general ledger to the chart of cost objects 1. Set a dimension to be the cost object dimension on the **Update CA Dimensions** page. Only the values from this dimension are transferred. -2. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Objects**, and then choose the related link. +2. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 3.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Objects**, and then choose the related link. 3. Choose the **Get Cost Objects from Dimension** action to transfer dimension values to the chart of cost objects. The function transfers the dimension values that you defined in step 1. > [!NOTE] diff --git a/business-central/finance-troubleshooting-correcting-dimensions.md b/business-central/finance-troubleshooting-correcting-dimensions.md index cdb4b207e..7a453a1ee 100644 --- a/business-central/finance-troubleshooting-correcting-dimensions.md +++ b/business-central/finance-troubleshooting-correcting-dimensions.md @@ -9,15 +9,17 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: dimension, correction, correct, business intelligence -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/27/2021 ms.author: bholtorf --- # Troubleshooting and Correcting Dimensions + Financial reporting and analysis views often rely on data from dimensions. Despite the safeguards that are available, sometimes a mistake happens that can lead to inaccuracies. This topic describes some of the typical errors, and explains how to correct dimension assignments on posted transactions so that financial reports are accurate. ## Troubleshooting Dimensions Errors + When you post documents or journal lines that contain dimensions various errors may occur, however, they're typically related to an incorrect dimension setup or assignment. > [!NOTE] @@ -39,30 +41,33 @@ When you post documents or journal lines that contain dimensions various errors |A dimension correction does not complete correctly.||-Choose **Reset** to revert the correction to a draft state. This resets the changes, and you can run the correction again.| ## Changing Dimension Assignments After Posting + If you discover that an incorrect dimension has been used on posted general ledger entries, you can correct the dimension values and update your analysis views. That will help keep your financial reports and analyses accurate. > [!IMPORTANT] > The features for correcting dimensions are intended only to help make financial reporting accurate. Dimension corrections apply only to the G/L entries. They do not change the dimensions assigned to the entries in other ledgers for the same transaction. There will be a mismatch between the dimensions assigned in the general ledger and the sub-ledgers. ### Setting Up Dimension Corrections + There are two things to consider when setting up dimension corrections: * Are there dimensions that you do not want to allow people to change? On the **Dimension Correction Settings** page, specify the dimensions that you want to block for changes. * Who do you want to allow to change dimensions? To allow people to make changes, assign the **D365 DIM CORRECTION** permission to the users. The permissions allow them to create dimension corrections, run them, and undo them if needed. They'll also be able to specify blocked dimensions. For more information, see [Assign Permissions to Users and Groups](ui-define-granular-permissions.md). ### Correcting a Dimension + You can manually select one or more general ledger entries, or use filters to select sets of entries. If needed, you can also add or delete dimensions. 1. To start a dimension correction, use one the following pages: -* On the **GL/Register** page, by selecting a register, and then choosing the **Correct Dimensions** action. This starts a correction for the entries in the selected register. -* On the **General Ledger Entries** page, by choosing the **Dimension Correction** action. + * On the **GL/Register** page, by selecting a register, and then choosing the **Correct Dimensions** action. This starts a correction for the entries in the selected register. + * On the **General Ledger Entries** page, by choosing the **Dimension Correction** action. 2. In the **Description** field, enter information about the change. Other people might use this information later to understand what was done. 3. On the **Selected Ledger Entries** FastTab, choose the relevant entries. -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When you change a selection, the values on the **Dimension Correction Changes** FastTab are reset. Therefore, always select the entries before you specify dimension value changes. + > [!IMPORTANT] + > When you change a selection, the values on the **Dimension Correction Changes** FastTab are reset. Therefore, always select the entries before you specify dimension value changes. The following table describes the options. @@ -80,43 +85,41 @@ You can manually select one or more general ledger entries, or use filters to se 6. Choose **Run**. ### Validating Dimension Corrections + Before you run a correction, it's a good idea to validate it first. Validation checks for restrictions on value posting for the G/L accounts, restrictions for dimensions, and whether the dimension values are blocked. During validation, the status of the correction is set to **Validation in Process**. After you validate a correction, the result is shown in the **Validation Status** field. If errors were found, you can use the **View Errors** action to investigate them. After you correct an error, you must use the **Reopen** action to run the correction or a new validation. You can either run a correction immediately, or schedule it to run a later time. If you are running corrections on a large data set, we recommend that you schedule it to run outside business hours. For more information, see [Dimension Corrections on Large Data Sets](finance-troubleshooting-correcting-dimensions.md#dimension-corrections-on-large-data-sets). ### Undoing a Correction + After you correct a dimension, if you don't like what you see you can use the **Undo** action to reset the previous value. However, you can only undo the most recent correction. Before you undo a correction, you can validate the changes that the undo will make. For example, this is useful if dimension restrictions have changed after the correction was made. If the Undo action is not available, for example because you have made many corrections, you can use the **Copy to Draft** action to start a new correction for the same entries. ### Dimension Corrections on Large Data Sets + Use caution when correcting large sets of entries, for example, sets that include more than 10,000 entries. If you can, we recommend that you use the filters to run the corrections on smaller sets of data. It's also a good idea to run corrections outside the normal business hours. ### Using Analysis Views with Dimension Corrections + If **Update on Posting** is enabled for an analysis view, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] can the view when documents and journals are posted. You can also update views with this setting enabled with results of dimension corrections. To do so, turn on the **Update Analysis Views** toggle. Updating analysis views can impact performance, especially for large data sets, so we recommend that you update analysis views only for small data sets. ### Viewing Historical Dimension Corrections + If a general ledger entry has been corrected, you can investigate the change by using the **History of Dimension Corrections** action. ### Handling Incomplete Corrections + If a correction does not complete, a warning will display on the correction card. If that happens, you can use the **Reset** action to revert the correction to a draft status and undo the changes. You can then run the correction again. > [!NOTE] > Resetting an incomplete correction will not affect updates to analysis views because those happen at the end of the correction process. ### Using Cost Accounting with Corrected G/L Entries -After you correct dimensions your data for cost accounting will be out of sync. Cost accounting uses dimensions to aggregate amounts for cost centers and cost objects, and to run cost allocations. Changing dimensions for G/L entries will probably mean that you re-run your cost accounting models. Whether you need to just delete a few cost registers and re-run allocations, or you need to delete everything and re-run all of your models depends on the data that has been updated and how your cost accounting capabilities are set up. Identifying where dimension corrections will impact cost accounting and where updates are needed is a manual process. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not currently provide an automated way to do that. -## Correcting Number Assignments for Global Dimensions -In the Dimension Set Entry table, global dimensions are assigned **0** in the Shortcut Dimension No. field, and shortcut dimensions are assigned their shortcut dimension number, which can be 1 through 8. Some reports use these number assignments to determine the values to use in calculations. - -When dimension values are imported by using configuration packages that were created without running validation triggers, or by using custom code to call the Insert or Modify methods without running the OnInsert or OnModify validation triggers, sometimes shortcut dimensions are are assigned a number that is not 0. When this occurs, calculations will be incorrect for dimensions on recurring general journals that use the BD Balance by Account or BD Balance by Dimensions recurring methods. - -If an incorrect number is assigned, when you try to post or preview journals on the **Recurring General Journals** page, the **Error Messages** page will display. From the Error Messages page, you can choose the link in the **Source** field to run a report that will correct shortcut dimension number assignments in the Dimension Set Entry table. Alternatively, you can also search for **Update Shortcut Dimension No. for Dimension Set Entries** to run the report. - -After you run the report, on the **Change Log Entries** page you can review the changes made to the number in the Global Dimension No. field. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] always records the previous and new values. +After you correct dimensions your data for cost accounting will be out of sync. Cost accounting uses dimensions to aggregate amounts for cost centers and cost objects, and to run cost allocations. Changing dimensions for G/L entries will probably mean that you re-run your cost accounting models. Whether you need to just delete a few cost registers and re-run allocations, or you need to delete everything and re-run all of your models depends on the data that has been updated and how your cost accounting capabilities are set up. You must manually identify where dimension corrections will impact cost accounting and where updates are needed. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] does not currently provide an automated way to do that. ## See Also -[Dimension Set Entries Overview](design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) + [Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md) \ No newline at end of file +[Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md) diff --git a/business-central/hr-how-register-employees.md b/business-central/hr-how-register-employees.md index 0f9bdb97c..03f549588 100644 --- a/business-central/hr-how-register-employees.md +++ b/business-central/hr-how-register-employees.md @@ -16,11 +16,15 @@ ms.author: edupont --- # Register Employees -To use the Human Resources functionality, you must first register each employee by creating a card with all the core and related information. +To use the Human Resources functionality, you must first add each employee by filling out the fields on the **Employee Card** page. -You can modify an employee's details at any time. Keeping up-to-date records about your employees simplifies personnel tasks. For example, if an employee's address changes, you register this on the employee card. +## Adding new customers +You can add new employees manually, by filling out the fields on the **Employee Card** page, or you can use templates that contain predefined information. For example, you can create a templates for different types of employee profiles. Using templates saves time when adding new employees, and helps ensure that the information is correct each time. If you create templates for more than one type of employee, you can choose the template to use when you add an employee. If you create only one template it will be used for all new employees. After you create a template, you can use the **Apply Template** action to apply it to one or more selected employees. To create a template, you fill in the information that you want to reuse on the Employee Card page, and then save it as a template. -The following procedures describe how to create an initial employee card and how to assign two types of employee details to an employee. In addition, you can assign various other related information, such as qualifications and causes of inactivity. You assign employee information either by choosing a field or an action on the **Employee Card** page. +> [!TIP] +> It can be helpful to personalize the **Employee Template** page when you create a template. For example, you might want to add a field that is not already displayed on the page. For more information, see [Personalize Your Workspace](/dynamics365/business-central/ui-personalization-user#to-start-personalizing-a-page-through-the-personalizing-banner). + +You can modify an employee's details at any time. Keeping employee records up-to-date can simplify personnel-related tasks. For example, if an employee's address changes, you register this on the Employee Card page. > [!NOTE] > You can reimburse employees for their expenses during business activities. For this purpose, you must fill in the fields on the **Payments** FastTab on the **Employee Card** page. For more information, see [Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md). @@ -31,7 +35,7 @@ The following procedures describe how to create an initial employee card and how 3. On the **Employee Card** page, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] ## To insert a picture of an employee -If you have a picture of an employee in .bmp format, you can insert it on the employee card. +If you have a picture of an employee, you can insert it on the employee card. 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. 2. Open the card for the relevant employee. diff --git a/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave1.md b/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave1.md index b58835b0d..8c0ff6cfc 100644 --- a/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave1.md +++ b/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave1.md @@ -1 +1 @@ - **APPLIES TO:** Business Central 2021 release wave 1 and later \ No newline at end of file +> **APPLIES TO:** Business Central 2021 release wave 1 and later \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave2.md b/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave2.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63272662b --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/includes/2021_releasewave2.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +--- +author: edupont04 +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: include +ms.date: 10/01/2021 +ms.author: edupont +--- +> **APPLIES TO:** Business Central 2021 release wave 2 and later \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/includes/complete_sample_data.md b/business-central/includes/complete_sample_data.md index 9bb3aa9d6..bd18aade5 100644 --- a/business-central/includes/complete_sample_data.md +++ b/business-central/includes/complete_sample_data.md @@ -7,5 +7,5 @@ ms.date: 04/01/2021 ms.author: edupont --- > [!NOTE] -> This walkthrough requires sample data that is not available in the default demonstration company in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](prod_short.md)]. diff --git a/business-central/includes/create_new_customer.md b/business-central/includes/create_new_customer.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e5abf102 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/includes/create_new_customer.md @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +--- +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: include +ms.date: 09/24/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk +--- + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 11.](../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Customers** page, choose the **New** action. + + If only one customer template exists, then a new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. + + If more than one customer template exists, then a page opens from which you can select a customer template. In that case, follow the next two steps. +3. On the **Select a template for a new customer** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new customer card. +4. Choose the **OK** button. A new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. +5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the customer card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] diff --git a/business-central/includes/create_new_item.md b/business-central/includes/create_new_item.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38cfa5810 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/includes/create_new_item.md @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +--- +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: include +ms.date: 09/24/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk +--- + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 22.](../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Items** page, choose the **New** action. + + If only one item template exists, then a new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. +3. On the **Select a template for a new item** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new item card. +4. Choose the **OK** button. A new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. +5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the item card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] diff --git a/business-central/includes/create_new_vendor.md b/business-central/includes/create_new_vendor.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc864a20 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/includes/create_new_vendor.md @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +--- +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: include +ms.date: 09/27/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk +--- + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Vendors** page, Choose **New**. + + If more than one vendor template exists, then a page opens from which you can select a vendor template. In that case, follow the next two steps. + 1. On the **Select a template for a new vendor** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new vendor card. + 2. Choose the **OK** button. A new vendor card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. +3. Proceed to fill or change fields on the vendor card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] diff --git a/business-central/includes/ua-checklist.md b/business-central/includes/ua-checklist.md index a580c004e..ace274854 100644 --- a/business-central/includes/ua-checklist.md +++ b/business-central/includes/ua-checklist.md @@ -5,4 +5,4 @@ ms.topic: include ms.date: 04/01/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -Starting with 2021 release wave 1, the **Get started** checklist can help you set up key information. +The **Get started** checklist can help you set up key information. diff --git a/business-central/includes/ua-get-help.md b/business-central/includes/ua-get-help.md index a787e4f00..5f83e2cfb 100644 --- a/business-central/includes/ua-get-help.md +++ b/business-central/includes/ua-get-help.md @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ author: edupont04 ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: include -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/27/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -[!INCLUDE[prod_short](prod_short.md)] includes tooltips for fields and actions and teaching tips for some of the most important pages that can help guide you through the various business processes. On each tooltip and teaching tip, choose the **Learn more** link to open Help for the page in question. On all pages, use *Ctrl+F1* on your keyboard to open Help for the page in question. On any device, the question mark in the upper right corner opens the **Help and Support** page, and you can get to product Help from there as well. +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](prod_short.md)] includes tooltips for fields and actions and teaching tips for some of the most important pages that can help guide you through the various business processes. On each tooltip and teaching tip, choose the **Learn more** link to open Help for the page in question. On all pages, use *Ctrl+F1* on your keyboard to open Help for the page in question. On any device, use the question mark in the upper right corner to get to the **Help and Support** page and product Help. diff --git a/business-central/includes/ua-teachingtips.md b/business-central/includes/ua-teachingtips.md index 6b892d13e..08285e295 100644 --- a/business-central/includes/ua-teachingtips.md +++ b/business-central/includes/ua-teachingtips.md @@ -5,4 +5,4 @@ ms.topic: include ms.date: 04/01/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -Starting with 2021 release wave 1, some pages display a teaching tip with a short introduction to the page. Switch off teaching tips if you are not interested in seeing these short introductions when you open the relevant pages. If you switch off teaching tips, you can still open the teaching tip for a specific page by choosing the page title in the top left corner. +Some pages display a teaching tip with a short introduction to the page. Switch off teaching tips if you are not interested in seeing these short introductions when you open the relevant pages. If you switch off teaching tips, you can still open the teaching tip for a specific page by choosing the page title in the top left corner. diff --git a/business-central/index.md b/business-central/index.md index dfc976bb4..7cf8f7637 100644 --- a/business-central/index.md +++ b/business-central/index.md @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ ms.topic: landing-page ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/29/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ ms.author: edupont [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is a business management solution for small and mid-sized organizations that automates and streamlines business processes and helps you manage your business. Highly adaptable and rich with features, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] enables companies to manage their business, including finance, manufacturing, sales, shipping, project management, services, and more. Companies can easily add functionality that is relevant to the region of operation, and that is customized to support even highly specialized industries. -If you already have [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], then sign in at [https://businesscentral.dynamics.com](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com). Otherwise, [get the overview](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/business-central/overview/), [take the guided tour](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/en-us/guidedtour/dynamics/business-central/1/1), and then [start a free trial](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=847861). For more information about onboarding to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). +If you already have [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], then sign in at [https://businesscentral.dynamics.com](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com). Otherwise, [get the overview](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/business-central/overview/), [take the guided tour](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/en-us/guidedtour/dynamics/business-central/1/1), and then [start a free trial](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=847861). Check out the [quick start articles](quick-start-business-central.md) to help you get to know [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For more information about onboarding to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). > [!TIP] > Did you land here from inside [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]? If you are not sure where to find what you are looking for, you can **filter by titles** in the navigation pane to the left, or you can use the **Search** field at the top of the browser window. @@ -98,6 +98,7 @@ To subscribe to a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed of all updates that are t ## See Also [Dynamics 365 Business Central on Microsoft Learn](/learn/dynamics365/business-central?WT.mc_id=dyn365bc_landingpage-docs) +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) [Getting Started with Business Central](ui-get-ready-business.md) [Visit Our Video Library](across-videos.md) [Customizing [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/business-central/install-desktop-app.md b/business-central/install-desktop-app.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..861e43e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/install-desktop-app.md @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +--- +title: Get Business Central on Your Desktop +description: This article describes how to get the Business Central app on a Windows or MACiOS desktop. +author: jswymer +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: get-started-article +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: phone, tablet +ms.date: 10/01/2021 +ms.author: jswymer +--- +# Get Business Central Desktop App + +If you have a Windows (PC) or macOS computer, you can install a Business Central app on your desktop. +> [!NOTE] +> If you're using Business Central 2021 release wave 1 or earlier, get the app from [Windows Store](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734848). + +## Why use the app? + +The Business Central app resembles the web client, but it provides a few benefits like: + +- The app is readily available from the **Start** menu, you can easily pin it to the task bar, or have it launch by default when you start your computer. +- In general, the app also is a faster and smoother to render on screen, with no performance differences, compared to running [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] in the browser. +- The app opens in its own window, independent of any browser windows. This feature makes it easier to find when running a large number many apps or browser tabs. +- If you have more than one Business Central environment (online only), you can install the app separately for each environment. + + When you open the app for specific environment, the environment name is included in the window title. When working across multiple [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] environments, each app window is displayed separately. The name makes it easier for you to see which window is associated with each environment. + +## Install the app + +1. Open the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] web client in either Microsoft Edge or Google Chrome. + +2. If the page for selecting the environment appears, you can do one of two things: + + - Select the environment and go to the next step to install the app. In this case, the installed app will open the environment you select. + - Don't select the environment, and just go to next step to install the app. In this case, the installed app will open the environment selection page, instead of a specific environment. + +3. To install the app, depending on your browser, select ![Icon for installing an app in Edge.](media/ui-edge-install-app-icon.png) **App available. Install Business Central** or ![Icon for installing an app in Chrome.](media/ui-chrome-install-app-icon.png) **Install Business Central**, then **Install**. + + | Microsoft Edge | Google Chrome | + |--|--| + | :::image type="content" source="media/ui-edge-install-app-v2.png" alt-text="illustration of a button for installing an app in Edge."::: | :::image type="content" source="media/ui-chrome-install-app-v2.png" alt-text="illustration of a button for installing an app in Chrome."::: | + +Once installed, the app appears in the **Start** menu. If you've selected a specific environment for the app, the environment name is added to the app name in the **Start** menu. + +### For Business Central on-premises + +Installing the app when you're using Business Central on-premises is basically the same as described above. If you only have one tenant, just open the Business Central in your browser, then select either ![Icon for installing an app in Edge.](media/ui-edge-install-app-icon.png) **App available. Install Business Central** or ![Icon for installing an app in Chrome.](media/ui-chrome-install-app-icon.png) **Install Business Central** as shown above. + +The difference is when you have multiple tenants. Unlike [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] online, where you can install the app separately for different environments, with on-premises you can only install the app for one tenant. So, before you install the app when you have multiple tenants, be sure to switch to the correct tenant. Once installed, when you open the app, it will directly open the tenant. + + + +## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/modules/alternative-interfaces-dynamics-365-business-central/index) + +## See Also + +[Mobile Apps FAQ](ui-mobile-faq.yml) +[Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) +[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) + + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/install-mobile-app.md b/business-central/install-mobile-app.md index 8ef3d6e63..252e2fb90 100644 --- a/business-central/install-mobile-app.md +++ b/business-central/install-mobile-app.md @@ -1,16 +1,15 @@ --- title: Get Business Central on Your Mobile Device description: This topic describes the various ways you can view and edit your Business Central data, send to Excel and more on your phone or tablet. -author: edupont04 - +author: jswymer ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: get-started-article ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: phone, tablet -ms.date: 06/16/2021 -ms.author: edupont +ms.search.keywords: desktop, Windows, app +ms.date: 10/01/2021 +ms.author: jswymer --- # Getting Business Central on Your Mobile Device @@ -19,11 +18,12 @@ Access your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] data from your mobile > [!Video https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/videoplayer/embed/RE4Arje?rel=0] -## Get the app on my mobile device +> [!TIP] +> Do want an app on your Windows or macOS computer desktop? See [Get the Business Central Desktop App](install-desktop-app.md). -1. Install the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app on your mobile device by downloading the app from the Windows Store, App Store, or Google Play. +## Get the app on my mobile device - - [Windows Store](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734848) (PC only) +1. Install the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app on your mobile device by downloading the app from the App Store or Google Play. - [App Store](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734847) - [Google Play](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734849) 2. Launch the app from your mobile device. @@ -40,9 +40,8 @@ You should now have access to [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] and If you're using [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-premises, you can also enjoy the benefits of the mobile app. The installation is similar, but with a couple exceptions. -1. Install the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app on your mobile device by downloading the app from the Windows Store, App Store, or Google Play. +1. Install the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] app on your mobile device by downloading the app from the App Store or Google Play. - - [Windows Store](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734848) (PC only) - [App Store](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734847) - [Google Play](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=734849) 2. Launch the app from your mobile device. diff --git a/business-central/intercompany-how-setup.md b/business-central/intercompany-how-setup.md index 517e2ebb3..f0f34454d 100644 --- a/business-central/intercompany-how-setup.md +++ b/business-central/intercompany-how-setup.md @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ To send a transaction (such as a sales journal line) from one company and have t You must also set up an intercompany partner code for each partner company, which is agreed upon by all of the companies, and then assign that to customer and vendor cards respectively by filling in the **Intercompany Partner Code** field. -If you create or receive intercompany lines with items, you can either use your own item numbers, or you can set up your partner's item numbers for each relevant item, either in the **Vendor Item No.** field or in the **Common Item No.** field on the item card. You can also use the **Item Cross Reference** function to map your items' numbers to your intercompany partners descriptions of the items, open the card of each item, and then choose the **Cross References** action to set up cross-references between your item descriptions and those of the intercompany partner. For more information, see [Use Item Cross References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). +If you create or receive intercompany lines with items, you can either use your own item numbers, or you can set up your partner's item numbers for each relevant item, either in the **Vendor Item No.** field or in the **Common Item No.** field on the item card. You can also use the **Item Reference** function to map your items' numbers to your intercompany partners descriptions of the items, open the card of each item, and then choose the **Item References** action to set up references between your item descriptions and those of the intercompany partner. For more information, see [Use Item References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). If you will make intercompany sales transactions that include resources, you must fill in the **IC Partner Purch. G/L Acc. No.** field on the resource card for each relevant resource. This is the number of the intercompany general ledger account that the amount for this resource will be posted to in your partner's company. For more information, see [Set Up Resources](projects-how-setup-resources.md). diff --git a/business-central/inventory-how-register-new-items.md b/business-central/inventory-how-register-new-items.md index 1ef10ff31..ba0ddcaee 100644 --- a/business-central/inventory-how-register-new-items.md +++ b/business-central/inventory-how-register-new-items.md @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: item, finished good, component, raw material, assembly item, item substitution -ms.date: 07/29/2021 +ms.date: 09/24/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -36,13 +36,7 @@ The following procedure explains how to create an item card from scratch. You ca ## To create a new item card -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Items** page, choose the **New** action. - - If only one item template exists, then a new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -3. On the **Select a template for a new item** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new item card. -4. Choose the **OK** button. A new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the item card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] +[!INCLUDE[create_new_item](includes/create_new_item.md)] > [!NOTE] > In the **Costing Method** field, you set up how the item's unit cost is calculated by making assumptions about the flow of physical items through your company. Five costing methods are available, depending on the type of item. For more information, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). diff --git a/business-central/inventory-how-setup-units-of-measure.md b/business-central/inventory-how-setup-units-of-measure.md index 22e0b9669..6de5752a3 100644 --- a/business-central/inventory-how-setup-units-of-measure.md +++ b/business-central/inventory-how-setup-units-of-measure.md @@ -24,6 +24,8 @@ You can set up multiple units of measure for an item so that you can assign unit If an item is stocked in one unit of measure but produced in another, a production order is created that uses a manufacturing batch unit of measure to calculate the correct quantity of the components during the **Refresh Production Order** batch job. An example of a manufacturing batch unit of measure calculation is when a manufactured item is stocked in pieces but produced in tons. For more information, see [Work with Manufacturing Batch Units of Measure](production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md). +Another tool that makes it easier to work with multiple units of measure for items is the ability to specify a rounding precision for base units of measure. Specifying a rounding precision provides guidance on what someone should enter for a given business process, and helps reduce rounding issues. When you use alternate units of measure, the value in the **Qty. per Unit of Measure** field helps calculate the quantity in the base unit of measure, which can lead to rounding issues. For example, imagine you're receiving one box that contains six items. When the box arrives at your warehouse, you discover that one of the six items is missing. You decide not to post the receipt of one box, but instead change the quantity received to five of six pieces. That would lead to a receipt of 4.99998 pieces, rather than five. On the **Item Units of Measure** page, the **Quantity Rounding Precision** field lets you specify a value that will convert the quantity to a number that is easier to understand. Continuing with the example, we would enter **1** in the field to round up to an even five pieces. + ## To set up units of measure 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Units of Measure**, and then choose the related link. @@ -53,11 +55,11 @@ When you register a new item, you can choose the base unit of measure from the l In the **Base Unit of Measure** field at the bottom of the window, you can view or change the item's base unit of measure. You can also change the base unit of measure in the **Base Unit of Measure** field on the item card. In the **Item Units of Measure** page, the base unit of measure must have the value **1** in the **Qty. per Unit of Measure** field. -You can now use the alternate units of measure on purchase, production, and sales documents as described in the [To enter a default unit of measure code for sales and purchasing transactions](#to-enter-a-default-unit-of-measure-code-for-sales-and-purchasing-transactions) section. +You can now use the alternate units of measure on purchase, production, and sales documents. For more information, see [To enter a default unit of measure code for sales and purchasing transactions](#to-enter-a-default-unit-of-measure-code-for-sales-and-purchasing-transactions). ## To set up unit of measure translations -When you sell items to foreign customers, you may want to specify the unit of measure in the customer's language. You can do this after you have set up the necessary unit of measure translations. +When you sell items to foreign customers, you might want to specify the unit of measure in the customer's language. You can do that by specifying translations for units of measure. 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Units of Measure**, and then choose the related link. 2. Select the code for which you want to set up translations, and then choose the **Translations** action. diff --git a/business-central/inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md b/business-central/inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md index 812945fb8..edd4b2d79 100644 --- a/business-central/inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md +++ b/business-central/inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- -title: Use Item Cross-References -description: Set up cross-references between the descriptions that you and your vendor use for an item to insert the vendor's item description on purchase documents. +title: Use Item References +description: Set up references between the descriptions that you and your vendor use for an item to insert the vendor's item description on purchase documents. author: bholtorf ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -13,32 +13,36 @@ ms.date: 06/16/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -# Use Item Cross References -If you set up a cross reference between the item description that you use for an item and the description that the vendor of that item uses, then the vendor's item description is automatically inserted on purchase documents for the vendor when you fill in the **Cross-Reference No.** field. The same functionality applies for customer item numbers on sales documents. +# Use Item References +If you set up a reference between the item description that you use for an item and the description that the vendor of that item uses, then the vendor's item description is automatically inserted on purchase documents for the vendor when you fill in the **Item Reference No.** field. The same functionality applies for customer item numbers on sales documents. -The following procedures describe how to use item cross references on the purchase side. The steps are similar for the sales side. +The following procedures describe how to use item references on the purchase side. The steps are similar for the sales side. > [!NOTE] -> It's becoming more common for item identifiers such as GTINs or GUIDs to contain 30 or more characters, which is more than the current feature for item cross references can handle. If you need to use references that contain more than 30 characters, your administrator can turn on the **Write longer item references** feature on the [Feature Management](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com/?page=2610) page (link requires that you have a [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] tenant). How you use references doesn't change, but the names of things like pages and buttons will. For example, the **Item Cross-Reference Entries** page will become the **Item Reference Entries** page. +> Not all companies use item references, so to minimize clutter on pages we've hidden the related fields and actions. If you decide to use them, you can turn on the **Use Item References** toggle on the **Inventory Setup** page. After you enable item references, the fields and actions are available on the Item Card, Vendor Card, and Customer Card pages, and from sales and purchase documents. -## To set up an item cross reference to a vendor's item description +## To start using item references +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. +2. Turn on the **Use Item References** toggle. + +## To set up an item reference to a vendor's item description 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for an item for which you want to create a cross reference to the item description that the vendor uses for that item. -3. Choose the **Cross References** action. +2. Open the card for an item for which you want to create a reference to the item description that the vendor uses for that item. +3. Choose the **Item References** action. - If you cannot find the **Cross References** action, choose to view more options, and then find it under **Related** > **Item**. + If you cannot find the **Item References** action, choose to view more options, and then find it under **Related** > **Item**. -4. On a new line on the **Item Cross-Reference Entries** page, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. +4. On a new line on the **Item Reference Entries** page, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. ## To enter a vendor's item description on a purchase order 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a purchase order for the vendor that you set up an item cross reference for in the previous procedure. -3. Create a purchase line for the item that you set up an item cross reference for in the previous procedure. -4. In the **Cross-Reference No.** field, select the item cross reference that you have created, and then choose the **OK** button. +2. Create a purchase order for the vendor that you set up an item reference for in the previous procedure. +3. Create a purchase line for the item that you set up an item reference for in the previous procedure. +4. In the **Item Reference No.** field, select the item reference that you have created, and then choose the **OK** button. -The **Description** field on the line is overwritten with the vendor's item description, as set up on the item cross-reference entry. +The **Description** field on the line is overwritten with the vendor's item description, as set up on the item reference entry. ## See Also [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) diff --git a/business-central/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md b/business-central/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md index 063f4d9a3..a64e6b07d 100644 --- a/business-central/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md +++ b/business-central/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ To enable conversion of a catalog item card to a normal item card, you must firs 2. Open the card for a catalog item that you want to convert to a normal item. 3. On the **Catalog Item Card** page, choose the **Create Item** action. -A new item card prefilled with information from the catalog item and a relevant item template is created. You can then fill or edit fields on the new item card as necessary. For more information, see [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). +A new item card pre-filled with information from the catalog item and a relevant item template is created. You can then fill or edit fields on the new item card as necessary. For more information, see [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). ## To sell a catalog item, and convert it to a normal item 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ A new item card prefilled with information from the catalog item and a relevant You can then fill or edit fields on the new item card as necessary. For more information, see [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). > [!NOTE] -> An Item cross reference record is automatically created for the vendor of the item between the vendor's item number and your new item number. For more information, see [Use Item Cross References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). +> An item reference is automatically item between the vendor's item number and your new item number. For more information, see [Use Item References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md). ## See Also [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) diff --git a/business-central/inventory-manage-inventory.md b/business-central/inventory-manage-inventory.md index dfad4cb2c..8c0f5cc35 100644 --- a/business-central/inventory-manage-inventory.md +++ b/business-central/inventory-manage-inventory.md @@ -1,7 +1,6 @@ --- title: Managing Inventory description: This topic describes how to manage the physical products that you trade in by creating an Inventory item card. -documentationcenter: '' author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -14,7 +13,8 @@ ms.date: 06/16/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -# How to Manage Inventory +# Manage Inventory + For each physical product that you trade in, you must create an item card of type **Inventory**. Items that you offer to customers but do not keep in inventory you can register as catalog items, which you can convert to inventory items when necessary. You can increase or decrease the quantity of an item in inventory by posting directly to the item ledger entries, for example, after a physical count or if you do not record purchases. Inventory increases and decreases are naturally also recorded when you post purchase and sales documents respectively. For more information, see [Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md), [Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md), and [Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). Transfers between locations changes inventory quantities across your company's warehouses. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The following table outlines related tasks. |Set up item tracking so that you can track items serial numbers, for example to track items in case of recalls.|[Set Up Item Tracking with Serial, Lot, and Package Numbers](inventory-how-setup-item-tracking.md)| |Assign serial numbers or lot numbers to any outbound or inbound document or journal line.|[Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md)| |Find where any serial or lot number was used in its supply chain, for example in recall situations.|[Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md)| -|Set up a vendor's or customer's own item description on your item card so that you can quickly insert their item description on trade documents.|[Use Item Cross-References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md)| +|Set up a vendor's or customer's own item description on your item card so that you can quickly insert their item description on trade documents.|[Use Item References](inventory-how-use-item-cross-refs.md)| |Block items from being entered on sales or purchase lines or from being posted in any transaction.|[Block Items](inventory-how-block-items.md)| |Manage business operations in sales offices, a purchasing departments, or plant planning offices across multiple locations.|[Work with Responsibility Centers](inventory-responsibility-centers.md)| |Use resources with specific skills for various services and service items.|[Set Up Resource Allocation](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md)| diff --git a/business-central/keyboard-shortcuts.md b/business-central/keyboard-shortcuts.md index d14422d95..1c3eba997 100644 --- a/business-central/keyboard-shortcuts.md +++ b/business-central/keyboard-shortcuts.md @@ -84,22 +84,22 @@ The following table describes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use on a list Grids containing rows and columns exist on many page types in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], such as list pages and **Lines** parts on documents. Moving from one cell to another across a grid is fully keyboard-enabled. -|Press these keys
(in macOS)|To do this in a list view |To do this in a tile view | -|--------------------------------|--------------------------|--------------------------| -|Ctrl+Home
(Fn+Ctrl+Left Arrow)|Select the first row in the list; focus remains in the same column.|Move to the first tile in the first row. | -|Ctrl+End
(Fn+Ctrl+Right Arrow)|Select the last row in the list; focus remains in the same column.|Move to the last tile in the last row.| -|Home
(Fn+Left Arrow)|Move to the first field in the row.|Move to the first tile in the row.| -|End
(Fn+right Arrow)|Move to the last field in the row.|Move to the last tile in the row.| -|Enter|Open the record that is associated with the field.

Only relevant if a card page is associated with the record.|Opens the record.

Only relevant if a card page is associated with the record.| -|Ctrl+Enter|Move focus to the next element outside the list.|Move focus to the next element outside the list.| -|Page Up
(Fn+Up Arrow)|Scroll to display the set rows above the current rows in view. |Scrolls to display the set of tiles above the current tiles in view. | -|Page Down
(Fn+Down Arrow)|Scroll to display the set rows below the current rows in view.|Scroll to display the set of tiles below the current tiles in view.| -|Down Arrow|Move in the same column to the field in the row below. |Move in the same column to the tile in the row below. | -|Up Arrow|Move in the same column to the field in the row above.| Move in the same column to the tile in the row above. | -|Right Arrow|In a view-only list, move in the same row to the next field to the right.

In an editable list, move to the right within the current field.| Move in the same row to the next tile to the right. | -|Left Arrow|In a view-only list, move in the same row to the previous field to the left.

In an editable list, move to the left within the current field.| Move in the same row to the previous tile to the left. | -|Tab|In editable list, move in the same row to the next field to the right.|Not applicable.|| -|Shift+Tab|In editable list, move in the same row to the previous field to the left. | Not applicable. | +| Press these keys
(in macOS) | To do this in a list view | To do this in a tile view | +|--|--|--| +| Ctrl+Home
(Fn+Ctrl+Left Arrow) | Select the first row in the list; focus remains in the same column. | Move to the first tile in the first row. | +| Ctrl+End
(Fn+Ctrl+Right Arrow) | Select the last row in the list; focus remains in the same column. | Move to the last tile in the last row. | +| Home
(Fn+Left Arrow) | Move to the first field in the row. | Move to the first tile in the row. | +| End
(Fn+right Arrow) | Move to the last field in the row. | Move to the last tile in the row. | +| Enter | Open the record that is associated with the field.

Only relevant if a card page is associated with the record. | Opens the record.

Only relevant if a card page is associated with the record. | +| Ctrl+Enter | Move focus to the next element outside the list. | Move focus to the next element outside the list. | +| Page Up
(Fn+Up Arrow) | Scroll to display the set rows above the current rows in view. | Scrolls to display the set of tiles above the current tiles in view. | +| Page Down
(Fn+Down Arrow) | Scroll to display the set rows below the current rows in view. | Scroll to display the set of tiles below the current tiles in view. | +| Down Arrow | Move in the same column to the field in the row below. | Move in the same column to the tile in the row below. | +| Up Arrow | Move in the same column to the field in the row above. | Move in the same column to the tile in the row above. | +| Right Arrow | In a view-only list, move in the same row to the next field to the right.

In an editable list, move to the right within the current field. | Move in the same row to the next tile to the right. | +| Left Arrow | In a view-only list, move in the same row to the previous field to the left.

In an editable list, move to the left within the current field. | Move in the same row to the previous tile to the left. | +| Tab | In editable list, move in the same row to the next field to the right. | Not applicable. | | +| Shift+Tab | In editable list, move in the same row to the previous field to the left. | Not applicable. | ### Selecting, Copying, and Pasting diff --git a/business-central/marketing-create-contact-profile-questionnaire.md b/business-central/marketing-create-contact-profile-questionnaire.md index 238b4da2a..c066b3790 100644 --- a/business-central/marketing-create-contact-profile-questionnaire.md +++ b/business-central/marketing-create-contact-profile-questionnaire.md @@ -45,114 +45,35 @@ You can automatically classify your contacts according to customer, vendor, and After you have set up automatically answered profile questions, if you assign the profile questionnaire containing these questions to a contact, [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] will automatically assign the right answers for the contact. ## Example + You can classify your contacts according to how much they bought from you: - ---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
AnswerApplies to

A

contacts who bought for 500,000 LCY or more

B

contacts who bought for 100,000 up to 499,999 LCY

C

contacts who bought for 99,999 LCY or less

+|Answer|Applies to| +|--- |--- | +|A|contacts who bought for 500,000 LCY or more| +|B|contacts who bought for 100,000 up to 499,999 LCY| +|C|contacts who bought for 99,999 LCY or less| To do this, fill on the **Profile Questionnaire Setup** page as follows: - - ------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TypeDescriptionAutomatic ClassificationFrom ValueTo Value

Question

ABC Classification

Click to insert a check mark

 

 

Answer

A

 

500,000

 

Answer

B

 

100,000

499,999

Answer

C

 

 

99,999

+| Type | Description | Automatic Classification | From Value | To Value | +|----------|--------------------|------------------------------|------------|----------| +| Question | ABC Classification | Click to insert a check mark | | | +| Answer | A | | 500,000 | | +| Answer | B | | 100,000 | 499,999 | +| Answer | C | | | 99,999 | Then fill on the **Profile Question Details** page as follows: - ---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FieldValue
Customer Classification FieldSales (LCY)
Classification MethodDefined Value
+ +| Field | Value | +|-------------------------------|---------------| +| Customer Classification Field | Sales (LCY) | +| Classification Method | Defined Value | When you assign the profile questionnaire containing this question to a contact, application automatically enters the relevant answer for this contact on the profile lines of the contact card. ## See Also + [Creating Contacts](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) diff --git a/business-central/media/OneDrive attachment.PNG b/business-central/media/OneDrive attachment.PNG new file mode 100644 index 000000000..588de7457 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/OneDrive attachment.PNG differ diff --git a/business-central/media/Open in OneDrive.PNG b/business-central/media/Open in OneDrive.PNG new file mode 100644 index 000000000..045e22de4 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/Open in OneDrive.PNG differ diff --git a/business-central/media/email-word-tmpl.PNG b/business-central/media/email-word-tmpl.PNG new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4d6424663 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/email-word-tmpl.PNG differ diff --git a/business-central/media/my-settings-cloud-storage.PNG b/business-central/media/my-settings-cloud-storage.PNG new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4ae7ea1c Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/my-settings-cloud-storage.PNG differ diff --git a/business-central/media/outlook-addin-action-bar.png b/business-central/media/outlook-addin-action-bar.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9931e4f50 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/outlook-addin-action-bar.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-addin.png b/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-addin.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d513ee86e Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-addin.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-icon.png b/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd90f43ba Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/outlook-business-central-icon.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/outlook-more-actions-button.png b/business-central/media/outlook-more-actions-button.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5d98fdee9 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/outlook-more-actions-button.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/teams-share-link.png b/business-central/media/teams-share-link.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13f545e4a Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/teams-share-link.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-icon.png b/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83dbe5460 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-icon.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-v2.png b/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-v2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f24b4af03 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/ui-chrome-install-app-v2.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-icon.png b/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-icon.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..472ae538b Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-icon.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-v2.png b/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-v2.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f7d89e78 Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/ui-edge-install-app-v2.png differ diff --git a/business-central/media/word-tmpl-merge-field.PNG b/business-central/media/word-tmpl-merge-field.PNG new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7b89e480a Binary files /dev/null and b/business-central/media/word-tmpl-merge-field.PNG differ diff --git a/business-central/power-bi-faq.md b/business-central/power-bi-faq.md index dc9f25f69..ab837a6d6 100644 --- a/business-central/power-bi-faq.md +++ b/business-central/power-bi-faq.md @@ -124,12 +124,6 @@ To filter larger datasets, the easiest way is to set a filter on your Power BI r There's currently no way of setting a filter for the web service data from within Business Central. If your application needs to set a filter from within Business Central, you'll have to create a custom Business Central App for this purpose. - - -### For embedding reports in Business Central pages, right now it's only possible to get reports from *My Workspace* in Power BI. Are there plans to make it possible to get them from custom workspaces? - -Yes. We have it in our plans to add support for shared workspaces, but we don't yet have a timeline to give you. - ### From Power BI, besides using a query, is there another way to get data from Business Central tables that don't have an associated page? For example, like the *Item Attributes Value Mapping* table. diff --git a/business-central/product-help-and-support.md b/business-central/product-help-and-support.md index dd5891e28..3280ef65b 100644 --- a/business-central/product-help-and-support.md +++ b/business-central/product-help-and-support.md @@ -11,18 +11,44 @@ ms.date: 07/09/2021 # Resources for Help and Support -In [!INCLUDE[prod_long](includes/prod_long.md)], the Help menu item (the question mark in the top-right corner) gives you access to the **Help & Support** page that can help you find answers to your questions. You can also see how you can contact technical support for your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +In [!INCLUDE[prod_long](includes/prod_long.md)], the Help menu item (the question mark in the top-right corner) gives you access to a help pane that can help you find answers to your questions. -This page outlines the resources available to you in the different sections of the **Help and Support** page. +## Search in the help pane + +[!INCLUDE [2021_releasewave2](includes/2021_releasewave2.md)] + +2021 release wave 2 includes a new help pane that has a search tab. Use the search field to search for guidance about how to use the product, built-in capabilities, and available training modules. Depending on your search terms, the pane shows 5 or more links with a short description. Choose a link, or refine your search terms. When you choose a link, the target article opens in a new browser tab. You can choose to un-dock the browser tab, then, so that you can view the relevant information side-by-side with [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. The pane remains open while you navigate through [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] so that content you searched for remains visible. + +> [!NOTE] +> In the current version of [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], the search field in the help pane only applies to content that is published to the docs.microsoft.com site. + +[!INCLUDE [ua-get-help](includes/ua-get-help.md)] These links can also access content that is published to other websites, such as the websites of providers of any apps that mare installed in your [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +## Help & Support page + +From the help pane, you can access the **Help & Support** page inside [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] that includes helpful links. You can also see how you can contact technical support for your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +This section outlines the resources available to you in the different sections of the **Help and Support** page as outlined in the following list: + +- [Find Answers](#find-answers) +- [Product Help](#product-help) +- [Community](#community) +- [Blog](#blog) +- [Capabilities Coming Soon](#capabilities-coming-soon) +- [Do More with Your Trial](#do-more-with-your-trial) +- [Give Feedback](#give-feedback) +- [Troubleshooting](#troubleshooting) +- [Report a Problem](#report-a-problem) +- [Support contacts](#support-contacts) > [!TIP] > [!INCLUDE [ua-get-help](includes/ua-get-help.md)] -## Find Answers +### Find Answers The **Find it** section provides links to the most common places to find answers to your questions. The links fall into four categories and are explained in the following subsections. Some of the links can be configured by your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partner, and as a result the behavior can be slightly different. -### Product Help +#### Product Help The **Find it** section includes two links to product Help: @@ -33,36 +59,36 @@ The **Find it** section includes two links to product Help: The functionality in the default version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is described on the [Docs.microsoft.com](/dynamics365/business-central) site. For more information, see the [Using the docs.microsoft.com site to learn more](#use-the-docsmicrosoftcom-site-to-learn-more) section. You can also extend and customize [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] with apps from AppSource. All apps provide links to the relevant product Help so that you can always find guidance for the different workflows in your version of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. -### Community +#### Community In the [Business Central Forum](https://community.dynamics.com/business/f), you can submit a question and learn from other [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] community members. Partners and Microsoft employees participate in the conversations. If you do not yet have a partner, the Community can also help you get unblocked if you have questions. For example, if you just signed up for a trial, the Community can be a great starting point. -### Blog +#### Blog We talk about new capabilities on [the Dynamics 365 Blog](https://cloudblogs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/it/product/business-central/), including if there are special considerations. -### Capabilities Coming Soon +#### Capabilities Coming Soon [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] is updated with major feature updates every six months, and with monthly service updates. Choose the link to view the latest release plan. You can also get an overview of upcoming and recently released capabilities in [the release plans across Dynamics 365](/dynamics365/release-plans/). For the longer term overview, the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] [roadmap page](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/roadmap/business-central/) shows the general priorities for [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] in the coming years. -## Do More with Your Trial +### Do More with Your Trial This section gives you shortcuts to Microsoft AppSource where you can find solutions and services from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partners. Use the links to explore the full capabilities of [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] before you decide if you want to buy a subscription. You can also find a link to contact the sales team. > [!NOTE] > This section is only available in trial experiences. If you already bought [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], the section is not longer visible. -## Give Feedback +### Give Feedback On the [Dynamics 365 Ideas site](https://aka.ms/bcideas), you can provide suggestions for new feature and capabilities. Your input goes directly to Business Central's engineering backlog for investigation and prioritization. Make sure that you search through the list of submitted suggestions. Chances are that someone already submitted something similar, and that entry might have already received votes. Vote if an idea already has been submitted to get it prioritized on the engineering backlog. -## Troubleshooting +### Troubleshooting The **Troubleshooting** section shows technical information that your administrator or [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partner can use to unblock users. This includes information about the latest error message, the current version of your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], and a link to go to the **Page Inspection** page. For more information, see [Inspecting Pages in Business Central](across-inspect-page.md). @@ -75,7 +101,7 @@ As the internal administrator, you have access to the administration center wher - [Monitoring and analyzing telemetry](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/telemetry-overview) - [Enable sending telemetry to Application Insights](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/telemetry-enable-application-insights) -## Report a Problem +### Report a Problem Your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] reselling partner will help you with technical support. This section makes it easy for you to contact your reselling partner, if they have submitted their support contact details. If your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] partner then cannot resolve the problem, they will raise a support ticket with Microsoft. @@ -118,9 +144,12 @@ The table of contents includes a group of content that describes [local function The local functionality content describes the capabilities in [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] that can help you be compliant in the supported markets, such as tax statements and other reports. In some cases, the difference between the default version and the country-specific version is invisible to users. In other cases, users must set up reporting or electronic invoicing in a specific way. If you cannot find a description of a certain button or action in the general section, you can hopefully find it in the *Local Functionality* section. +> [!TIP] +> On the docs.microsoft.com site as well as in the in-product search field and in the help pane, the search results show some context for the target article. The context includes the link that might show the name of a country, or a short description that calls out a certain capability or a country, for example. + ### Finding other content -If you land on an article that doesn't answer your question, you can find other content in two ways: +If you land on an article that doesn't answer your question, you can find other content in two ways on the docs.microsoft.com site: - Use the **Filter by title** field in the table of contents on the left side of the website @@ -143,7 +172,7 @@ For each language, the table of contents is translated, but the content in the * ### Recommended content -In March 2021, a new section appeared under most articles on the docs.microsoft.com site. The **Recommended content** section is automatically generated based on how each article is used with the rest of the site. The links are not static and will change over time. +In March 2021, a new section appeared under most articles on the docs.microsoft.com site. The **Recommended content** section is automatically generated based on how each article is used with the rest of the docs.microsoft.com site. The links are not static and change over time. ### Tell us what you think @@ -168,6 +197,7 @@ The same applies if you use [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] on-p ## See Also [Business Central Learning Catalog](readiness/readiness-learning-catalog.md) +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) [How do I find a reselling partner?](/dynamics365/business-central/across-faq#findpartner) [Help System (available in English only)](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/user-assistance?toc=/dynamics365/business-central/toc.json) [Blog post: Find the right resources and provide feedback](https://community.dynamics.com/business/b/financials/posts/find-the-right-resources-and-provide-feedback) diff --git a/business-central/product-news.md b/business-central/product-news.md index a81fc55be..e283813d1 100644 --- a/business-central/product-news.md +++ b/business-central/product-news.md @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ You can always refer to the release plan for an overview of new and upcoming fun The following list provides information about the latest versions of [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +* [2021 release wave 2](/dynamics365-release-plan/2021wave2/smb/dynamics365-business-central/planned-features) * [2021 release wave 1](/dynamics365-release-plan/2021wave1/smb/dynamics365-business-central/planned-features) * [2020 release wave 2](/dynamics365-release-plan/2020wave2/smb/dynamics365-business-central/planned-features) -* [2020 release wave 1](/dynamics365-release-plan/2020wave1/dynamics365-business-central/planned-features) You can also explore the [Dynamics 365 Business Central Capabilities](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/business-central/capabilities/) site, and the [Dynamics 365 Business Central Roadmap](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/roadmap/business-central/) site. @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ You can also explore the [Dynamics 365 Business Central Capabilities](https://dy [Visit Our Video Library](across-videos.md) [Resources for Help and Support](product-help-and-support.md) [Dynamics 365 Business Central on Microsoft Learn](/learn/dynamics365/business-central?WT.mc_id=dyn365bc_landingpage-docs) +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) [Dynamics 365 Business Central Capabilities](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/business-central/capabilities/) [Dynamics 365 Business Central Roadmap](https://dynamics.microsoft.com/roadmap/business-central/) [Dynamics 365 Blog](https://cloudblogs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/it/product/business-central/) diff --git a/business-central/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md b/business-central/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md index cfb4336fc..c0924946b 100644 --- a/business-central/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md +++ b/business-central/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md @@ -30,22 +30,23 @@ You can either insert the production order lines manually or use the function th > [!NOTE] > If you use the Refresh function to recalculate production order lines, the old production order lines are deleted and new lines are calculated. -## To replan a production order -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the production order you want to replan. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Lines** action, and then choose the **Components** action. -4. Add a component, which is a produced item or subassembly. -5. From the production order, choose the **Replan** action. +## To replan a production order + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. +2. Open the production order you want to replan. +3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Lines** action, and then choose the **Components** action. +4. Add a component, which is a produced item or subassembly. +5. From the production order, choose the **Replan** action. On the **Replan Production Order** page, proceed to define how and what to replan. -6. In the **Scheduling Direction** field, select one of the following options. +6. In the **Scheduling Direction** field, select one of the following options. - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Back**|Calculates the operation sequence backwards from the earliest possible ending date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the latest possible starting date. **Note:** This default option is relevant in the majority of situations.| - |**Forward**|Calculates the operation sequence forward from the earliest latest possible starting date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the earliest possible ending date. **Note:** This option is only relevant for expedite orders.| + | Option | Description | + |--|--| + | **Back** | Calculates the operation sequence backwards from the earliest possible ending date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the latest possible starting date. **Note:** This default option is relevant in the majority of situations. | + | **Forward** | Calculates the operation sequence forward from the earliest latest possible starting date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the earliest possible ending date. **Note:** This option is only relevant for expedite orders. | -7. In the **Plan** field, select whether to calculate production requirements for produced items on the production BOM, as follows. +7. In the **Plan** field, select whether to calculate production requirements for produced items on the production BOM, as follows. |Option|Description| |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| @@ -53,20 +54,21 @@ You can either insert the production order lines manually or use the function th |**One Level**|Plan for first-level production demand. First-level production orders may be created.| |**All Levels**|Plan for all-level production demand. All-level production orders may be created.| -8. Select **One Level**, and choose the **OK** button to replan the production order, and calculate and create a new underlying production order for the introduced subassembly, if it is not fully available. +8. Select **One Level**, and choose the **OK** button to replan the production order, and calculate and create a new underlying production order for the introduced subassembly, if it is not fully available. > [!NOTE] -> Changes implemented with the **Replan** function are very likely to change the capacity need of the production order and you may therefore have to reschedule operations afterwards. +> Changes implemented with the **Replan** function are very likely to change the capacity need of the production order and you may therefore have to reschedule operations afterwards. + +## To refresh a production order -## To refresh a production order If you have amended production order lines, components, or routing lines, you must also refresh the information on the production order. In the following procedure, the components are calculated for a firm planned production order. The steps are similar for routing lines. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [Create Production orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). -3. Choose the **Refresh** action. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. +2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [Create Production orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). +3. Choose the **Refresh** action. 4. On the **Refresh Production Order** page, select one of the following options: - |Option||Description| + |Field|Option|Description| |----------------------------------|---------------|---------------------------------------| |**Scheduling Direction**|**Forward**|Scheduling starts from the starting date and proceeds forward to the finishing date. You must fill in the starting date to use this option.| ||**Backward**|Scheduling starts from the ending date and proceeds backward to the starting date.| @@ -78,9 +80,10 @@ If you have amended production order lines, components, or routing lines, you mu 5. Choose the **OK** button to confirm your selection. Now the production order lines are calculated. > [!NOTE] -> Calculating production order components deletes previous changes in the components. +> Calculating production order components deletes previous changes in the components. + +## See Also -## See Also [Planning](production-planning.md) [Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) [Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) diff --git a/business-central/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md b/business-central/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md index 7718c9b44..54539c542 100644 --- a/business-central/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md +++ b/business-central/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md @@ -1,8 +1,6 @@ --- -title: Set Up Time Sheets and Their Approval| Microsoft Docs +title: Set Up Time Sheets and Their Approval description: You set up time sheets to track the time used on jobs and using resources, helping you with project management, staffing, and capacity -services: project-madeira -documentationcenter: '' author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -11,11 +9,12 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: project management, capacity, staff, resource, time sheet -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 10/01/2021 ms.author: edupont --- # Set Up Time Sheets + Time sheets in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] handle time registration in weekly increments of seven days. You use them to track the time used on jobs, and you can use them to record simple resource time registration. Before you can use time sheets, you must specify how you want them to be set up and configured. After you have set up how your organization will use time sheets, you can specify if and how time sheets are approved. Depending on the needs of your organization, you can designate: @@ -23,9 +22,41 @@ After you have set up how your organization will use time sheets, you can specif * One or more users as the time sheet administrator and approver for all time sheets. * A time sheet approver for each resource. -When you have set up time sheets, you can create time sheets for resources, assign them to job planning lines, and post time sheet lines. For more information, see [Use Time Sheets](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md). +When you have set up time sheets, you can create time sheets for resources, assign them to job planning lines, and post time sheet lines. For more information, see [Use Time Sheets](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md). + +## Set up time sheets with the assisted setup guide + +[!INCLUDE [2021_releasewave2](includes/2021_releasewave2.md)] + +Starting in 2021 release wave 2, you can use an assisted setup guide to help you set up time sheets. + +> [!TIP] +> You must enable the **Feature Update: New time sheet experience** feature in the [Feature Management](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com/?page=2610) page to use this capability. +> +> The same feature also makes it easy to manage time sheets on a mobile device. + +The assisted setup guide takes you through the following steps: + +1. Set up the participants in the time sheet processes +2. Specify the first day of a work week in this organization + + The first day of a work week will be the default first day for all time sheets. +3. Specify the person who administers time sheets + + This person can edit and delete all time sheets. Optionally, add the same role to other people in the **User Setup** page. +4. Set up the resources who will use time sheets, and the people who will approve time sheets + + > [!NOTE] + > For projects and jobs, the users of time sheets are *resources*, not employees. So to be able to track the work of your employees, you must associate resources with employees in the setup guide. + +At the end of the setup guide, you can choose to let [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] create time sheets based on your configuration. Alternatively, run the assisted setup guide again, or complete the setup manually. + +## Set up time sheets manually + +The following sections describe how to set up time sheets if you do not use the **Set up time sheets** assisted setup guide. + +### To set up general information for time sheets manually -## To set up general information for time sheets 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Resources Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] 3. For the **Time Sheet by Job Approval** field, select one of the following options. @@ -36,29 +67,35 @@ When you have set up time sheets, you can create time sheets for resources, assi | **Always** |The user in the **Person Responsible** field on the job card approves the time sheet. | | **Machine Only** |If the machine time sheet is linked with a job, then the user in the **Person Responsible** field on the job card approves the time sheet. If the machine time sheet is linked with a resource, then the user in the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field on the resource card approves the time sheet. | -## To assign a time sheet administrator +### To assign a time sheet administrator manually + 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. 2. Add a new user if the user list does not include the person who you want to be the time sheet administrator. For more information, see [Assign Permissions to Users and Groups](ui-define-granular-permissions.md). 3. Select a user to be a time sheet administrator, and then select the **Time Sheet Admin.** check box. > [!TIP] -> It is recommended that you designate only one user to be the time sheet administrator for a company. In the following procedure, you set up a time sheet owner and approver where the time sheet approver is assigned for each resource. +> It is recommended that you designate only one user to be the time sheet administrator for a company. In the following procedure, you set up a time sheet owner and approver where the time sheet approver is assigned for each resource. + +### To assign a time sheets owner and approver manually -## To assign a time sheets owner and approver 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. 2. Select the resource for which you want to set up the ability to use time sheets, and then select the **Use Time Sheet** check box. 3. In the **Time Sheet Owner User ID** field, enter the ID of the owner of the time sheet. The owner can enter time usage on a time sheet and submit it for approval. In general, when the resource is a person, that person is also the owner. 4. In the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field, enter the ID of the approver of the time sheet. The approver can approve, reject, or reopen a time sheet. > [!NOTE] -> You cannot change the ID of the time sheet approver if there are time sheets that have not yet been processed and have the status of **Submitted** or **Open**. +> You cannot change the ID of the time sheet approver if there are time sheets that have not yet been processed and have the status of **Submitted** or **Open**. ## See Also + +[Use Time Sheets for Jobs](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md) +[To create time sheets](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md#to-create-time-sheets) +[Record Consumption or Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md) [Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) [Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) [Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) +[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) +[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/business-central/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md b/business-central/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md index 036be2d92..3fbd1e7f2 100644 --- a/business-central/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md +++ b/business-central/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -title: Work with Time Sheets for Jobs +title: Use Time Sheets for Projects description: Describes how to create a time sheet for a job, copy planning lines to it, define work types, fill in the time sheet, and submit it for approval. author: SorenGP @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ ms.date: 08/24/2021 ms.author: edupont --- -# Use Time Sheets for Jobs +# Use Time Sheets for Projects You use the **Create Time Sheets** batch job to set up time sheets for a specified number of time periods or weeks. You must have permissions to be able to create time sheets. @@ -21,9 +21,12 @@ You can copy and use your job planning lines in a time sheet. In that way, you m After you have approved time sheet entries for a job, you can post them to the relevant job journal or resource journal. -Before you can use time sheets, you must set up general information and specify an administrator and one or more approvers of time sheets. For more information, see [Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). +Before you can use time sheets, you must set up general information and specify an administrator and one or more approvers of time sheets. For more information, see [Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). -## To create a time sheet +> [!TIP] +> Starting in 2021 release wave 2, you can manage assigned time sheets on a mobile device. However, your administrator may have to enable the **Feature Update: New time sheet experience** feature in the [Feature Management](https://businesscentral.dynamics.com/?page=2610) page to use this capability. For more information, see [Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). + +## To create time sheets You can use the **Create Time Sheets** batch job to set up time sheets for a specified number of time periods or weeks. Then, the time sheet owner can open it and record time that has been spent on a task. diff --git a/business-central/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md b/business-central/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md index 07270ec51..6d25dc580 100644 --- a/business-central/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md +++ b/business-central/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: supplier -ms.date: 06/23/2021 +ms.date: 09/29/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -28,32 +28,31 @@ Vendor cards hold the information that is required to buy products from the vend > [!Video https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3PZtd?rel=0] ## Adding new vendors +You can add new vendors manually, by filling out the fields on the **Vendor Card** page, or you can use templates that contain predefined information. For example, you can create a templates for different types of vendor profiles. Using templates saves time when adding new vendors, and helps ensure that the information is correct each time. If you create templates for more than one type of vendor, you can choose the template to use when you add a vendor. If you create only one template it will be used for all new vendors. After you create a template, you can use the **Apply Template** action to apply it to one or more selected vendors. To create a template, you fill in the information that you want to reuse on the Vendor Card page, and then save it as a template. For more information, see [To save the Vendor Card page as a template](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md#to-save-the-vendor-card-as-a-template). -To register a new vendor, you must fill in a vendor card. You can establish templates for different vendor profiles, or you can add vendors without templates. You can also create a vendor from a contact. For more information, see [To create a customer, vendor, employee, or bank account from a contact](marketing-create-contact-companies.md#to-create-a-customer-vendor-employee-or-bank-account-from-a-contact). +> [!TIP] +> It can be helpful to personalize the **Vendor Template** page when you create a template. For example, you might want to add a field that is not already displayed on the page. For more information, see [Personalize Your Workspace](/dynamics365/business-central/ui-personalization-user#to-start-personalizing-a-page-through-the-personalizing-banner). -> [!NOTE] -> If vendor templates exist for different vendor types, then a page appears when you create a new vendor card from where you can select an appropriate template. If only one vendor template exists, then new vendor cards always use that template. - -### To create a new vendor card +You can also create a vendor from a contact. For more information, see [To create a customer, vendor, employee, or bank account from a contact](marketing-create-contact-companies.md#to-create-a-customer-vendor-employee-or-bank-account-from-a-contact). -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Vendors** page, Choose **New**. +### To create a new vendor - If more than one vendor template exists, then a page opens from which you can select a vendor template. In that case, follow the next two steps. - 1. On the **Select a template for a new vendor** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new vendor card. - 2. Choose the **OK** button. A new vendor card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -3. Proceed to fill or change fields on the vendor card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] +[!INCLUDE[create_new_vendor](includes/create_new_vendor.md)] - > [!TIP] - > If you do not know the invoicing address that will be used for every invoice from a vendor, do not fill in the **Vendor No.** field. Instead, choose the pay-to vendor number after you have set up a purchase quote, order, or invoice header. +> [!TIP] +> If you do not know the invoicing address that will be used for every invoice from a vendor, do not fill in the **Vendor No.** field. Instead, choose the pay-to vendor number after you have set up a purchase quote, order, or invoice header. The vendor is now registered, and the vendor card is ready to be used on purchase documents. If you want to use this vendor card as a template when you create new vendor cards, you can save it as a vendor template. For more information, see the [To save the vendor card as a template](#to-save-the-vendor-card-as-a-template) section. -### Deleting vendor cards +### Deleting and editing vendor information + +You can edit the information on vendor cards at any time. However, if you have posted a transaction for a vendor, you cannot delete the card because the ledger entries may be needed for auditing. To delete vendor cards with ledger entries, contact your Microsoft partner to do so through code. + +> [!TIP] +> You can change the IBAN on a vendor bank account without the change affecting your historical credit transfer register entries. Credit transfer register entries store the Recipient IBAN, Recepient Bank Account No. that were specified in the Vendor Bank Account and Recipient Name fields from the Vendor Card page when the entries were created. -If you have posted a transaction for a vendor, you cannot delete the card because the ledger entries may be needed for auditing. To delete vendor cards with ledger entries, contact your Microsoft partner to do so through code. ## To save the vendor card as a template diff --git a/business-central/quick-start-business-central.md b/business-central/quick-start-business-central.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bda1aad50 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/quick-start-business-central.md @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +--- +title: Business Central Quick Starts +description: Get up and running with Business Central with tips from the Quick Starts articles that help you fill in the first critical fields. +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: quickstart +ms.date: 09/29/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk + +--- + +# Business Central Quick Starts + +These quick start articles help you get started as soon as possible so that you can perform the basic functions that you need in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +The following sections take you to guides for beginners that help you get familiar with the features you need in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. In each quick start, find links to more advanced content about the functionality, should you need it. + +## Provide basic information about your company + +The first step is to provide the basic information about your company. This includes information such as address, bank accounts, VAT number, and so on. This is explained in the [Company Information Quick Start](quick-start-company-information.md) article. + + + + + +## Sell products and services + +To quickly get up and running with selling products and services, see the [Quick Start for Sales](quick-start-sell-products-and-services.md) article. + + + +## Buy products and services + +To learn how to buy products and services, see the [Quick Start for Procurement](quick-start-procurement.md) article. + + + + + +## See Also + +[Overview of Business Functionality](across-business-functionality.md) +[Business Central Learning Catalog](readiness/readiness-learning-catalog.md) +[Overview of Tasks to Set Up Business Central](setup.md) diff --git a/business-central/quick-start-company-information.md b/business-central/quick-start-company-information.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4ee1c625f --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/quick-start-company-information.md @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +--- +title: Company Information Quick Start +description: Learn how to fill in the first critical fields about your company in Business Central by reading this Quick Start article. +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: quickstart +ms.date: 09/29/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk +--- + +# Company Information Quick Start + +To help you get your company up and running in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], you must first fill in some of the basic company details and relevant information based on your business needs. + +You can enter all relevant data on the **Company Information** page when you set up a new company. + +## To set up company information + +1. Choose the ![Sprocket icon to open the Settings menu.](media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png) menu, and then choose the **Company Information** action. +2. Enter the information into the FastTabs as described in the following table. + + |Field|Description| + |-------------|---------------------------------------| + |**General**|Enter the general information about your company including a logo since that will be appearing on customer facing documents, for example invoices that you send out. | + |**Communication**|Enter the basic company contact information, such as phone number and email address.| + |**Payments**| Fill in the relevant banking information to insure that your customers will be able to pay you.| + |**Shipping**|Fill in the relevant shipping information so that you will be able to send and receive goods from and to your company.| + |**Tax**|Depending on the country you live in the Tax fast tab may be available to you. If it is available fill it out.| + +Once you have completed filling in the information you can close the page. + +## See Also + +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) +[Set Up Company Information](LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information.md) diff --git a/business-central/quick-start-procurement.md b/business-central/quick-start-procurement.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff5011c3f --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/quick-start-procurement.md @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +--- +title: Procurement Quick Start +description: Learn how to fill in the first critical fields about vendors in Business Central so that you can start purchasing products and services. +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: quickstart +ms.date: 09/29/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk + +--- + +# Procurement Quick Start + +To be able to buy products and services, you must first set up vendors. Once that is done, you can start registering purchase orders and receiving invoices. + +## Set up vendors + +The following video shows you how to set up a vendor in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +

+ +> [!Video https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3PZtd?rel=0] + +### Set up a new vendor + +[!INCLUDE[create_new_vendor](includes/create_new_vendor.md)] + +For more information and additional things you can do when you register vendors, see [Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md). + +## Create new purchase orders + +When you buy something from a vendor you have two options. The first, and simplest, is to just create a purchase invoice. However, you must use purchase orders if your purchasing process requires that you record partial receipts of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity was not available at the vendor. + +The following video shows you how to create a purchase order in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +

+ +> [!Video https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE4b3tt?rel=0] + +### To create a purchase order + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. + +2. On the **Purchase Orders** page, select the **New** action to create a new Purchase Order. + +3. In the **Vendor Name** field, enter the name of an existing vendor. + + Other fields on the **Purchase Header** are now filled with the standard information about the selected vendor. + +4. Fill in the remaining fields on the **Purchase Order** page as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] + + You are now ready to fill in the purchase order lines with items or resources that you have purchased from the vendor. + +5. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Item No.** field, enter the number of an inventory item or service. + +6. In the **Quantity** field, enter the number of items to be purchased. + + The **Line Amount** field is updated to show the value in the **Direct Unit Cost** field multiplied by the value in the **Quantity** field. + +7. In the **Order Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field at the bottom of the order. + +8. When you receive the purchased items or services, choose **Post**. + +For more information and additional things you can do when creating a purchase order, see [Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md). + +## Create a purchase invoice + +You create a purchase invoice to record the cost of purchases and to track accounts payable. Creating a purchase invoice is similar to creating a purchase order. + +### How to create and post a purchase invoice + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 3.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Purchase Invoice** page, select the **New** action to create a new Purchase Invoice. +3. In the **Vendor** field, enter the name of an existing vendor. + + Other fields on the **Purchase Invoice** page are now filled with the standard information of the selected vendor. + +4. Fill in the remaining fields on the **Purchase Invoice** page as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] + + You are now ready to fill in the purchase invoice lines with items or resources that you have purchased from the vendor. + +5. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Item No.** field, enter the number of an inventory item or service. +6. In the **Quantity** field, enter the number of items to be purchased. + + The **Line Amount** field is updated to show the value in the **Direct Unit Cost** field multiplied by the value in the **Quantity** field. + +7. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field at the bottom of the invoice. + +8. When you receive the purchased items or services, choose **Post**. + +The purchase is now reflected in inventory, resource ledgers, and financial records, and the vendor payment is activated. The purchase invoice is removed from the list of purchase invoices and replaced with a new document in the list of posted purchase invoices. + +For more information and additional things you can do when creating a purchase invoice, see [Record Purchases with Purchase Invoices](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). + +## See Also + +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) +[Purchasing Overview](Purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) +[Record Purchases with Purchase Invoices](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) diff --git a/business-central/quick-start-sell-products-and-services.md b/business-central/quick-start-sell-products-and-services.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a5a0019f --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/quick-start-sell-products-and-services.md @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +--- +title: Sales Quick Start +description: Learn how to fill in the first critical fields about products and customers in Business Central so that you can start your sales processes. +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: quickstart +ms.date: 09/29/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk + +--- + +# Sales Quick Start + +To be able to sell products and services, you must first set up items and customers. Once that is done, you can start registering sales orders and sending out invoices. + +## Set up items to sell + +This video shows how to set up an item to sell in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +
+ +> [!Video https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/videoplayer/embed/RE47eLx?rel=0] + +### Set up a new item + +[!INCLUDE[create_new_item](includes/create_new_item.md)] + +For more information and additional things you can do when setting up items, see [Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). + +## Set up customers + +This video shows how to set up a new customer in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +
+ +> [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3PZsM] + +### Set up a new customer + +[!INCLUDE[create_new_customer](includes/create_new_customer.md)] + +For more information and additional things you can do when setting up customers, see [Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md) + +## Create a sales order + +When you sell something to a customer, you have two options. The first, and simplest, is to just create a sales invoice. However, if your sales process is more complex, for example if you have situations where you only ship parts of an order quantity, you use a sales order. + +### To create a sales order + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 10.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. +2. Select **New** to create a new entry. +3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. + + Other fields on the **Sales Order** page are now filled with the standard information of the selected customer. + +4. Fill in the remaining fields on the **Sales Order** page as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] + +5. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select what type of product, charge, or transaction that you will post for the customer with the sales line. + +6. In the **No.** field, enter the number of an inventory item or service. + +7. In the **Quantity** field, enter the number of items to be sold. + +8. In the **Line Discount %** field, enter a percentage if you want to grant the customer a discount on the product. + +9. To add a comment about the order line that the customer can see on the printed sales order, write a comment in the **Description** field on an empty line. + +10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for every item that you want to sell to the customer. + +11. To only ship a part of the order quantity, enter that quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field. The value is copied to the **Qty. to Invoice** field. + +12. To only invoice a part of the shipped quantity, enter that quantity in the **Qty. to Invoice** field. The quantity must be lower than the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field. + +13. When the sales order lines are completed, choose the **Post and Send** action. + +For more information and additional things you can do when creating customer sales orders, see [Sell Products with a Customer Sales Order](sales-how-sell-products.md). + +## Create a sales invoice + +When you create and post a sales invoice, you not only create the invoice document you send to the customer, you also create the related quantity and value entries in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +### To create and post a sales invoice + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 20.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. + +2. Select **New** to create a new entry. + +3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. + +4. Fill in the remaining fields on the **Sales Invoice** page as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] + +5. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select what type of product, charge, or transaction that you will post for the customer with the sales line. + +6. In the **No.** field, select a record to post according to the value in the **Type** field. + +7. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units of the product, charge, or transaction that the line will record for the customer. + +8. If you want to give a discount, enter a percentage in the **Line Discount %** field. The value in the **Line Amount** field updates accordingly. + +9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for every product or charge that you want to invoice the customer for. + +10. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field. + +11. When the sales invoice lines are completed, choose the **Post and Send** action. + +For more information and additional things you can do when creating customer sales invoices, see [Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) + +## See Also + +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) +[Sales Overview](sales-manage-sales.md) +[Sell Products with a Customer Sales Order](sales-how-sell-products.md) +[Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) diff --git a/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md b/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md index d7184319b..ef80a95cf 100644 --- a/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md +++ b/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations -description: Describes how to create a sales credit memo to process a return, cancellation, or reimbursement for items or services you have been received payment for. +description: Describes how to create a sales credit memo to process a return, cancellation, or reimbursement for items or services you have received payment for. author: SorenGP ms.service: dynamics365-business-central @@ -9,50 +9,37 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: undo, credit memo, return -ms.date: 06/23/2021 +ms.date: 09/27/2021 ms.author: edupont --- # Process Sales Returns or Cancellations -If a customer wants to return items or be reimbursed for items or services that you have sold and received payment for, you must create and post a sales credit memo that specifies the requested change. To include the correct sales invoice information, you can create the sales credit memo directly from the posted sales invoice or you can create a new sales credit memo with copied invoice information. -If you need more control of the sales return process, such as warehouse documents for the item handling or better overview when receiving items from multiple sales documents with one sales return, then you can create sales return orders. A sales return order automatically issues the related sales credit memo and other return-related documents, such as a replacement sales order, if needed. For more information, see [To create a sales return order based on one or more posted sales documents](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md#to-create-a-sales-return-order-based-on-one-or-more-posted-sales-documents). +If a customer wants to return items or be reimbursed for items or services that you have sold and received payment for, you must create and post a sales credit memo that specifies the requested change. To include the correct sales invoice information, you can do the following: -> [!NOTE] -> If a posted sales invoice has not yet been paid, then you can use the **Correct** or **Cancel** functions on the posted sales invoice to reverse transactions. These functions work only for unpaid invoices, and they do not support partial returns or cancellations. For more information, see [Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md). +- Create the sales credit memo directly from the posted sales invoice. +- Create a new sales credit memo with copied invoice information. -A return or reimbursement may relate to only some of the items or services on the original sales invoice. In that case, you must edit information on the lines on the sales credit memo or sales return order. When you post the sales credit memo or sales return order, the sales documents that are affected by the change are reversed and a refund payment can be created for the customer. For more information, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). +If you need more control of the sales return process, such as warehouse documents for the item handling, or a better overview when receiving items from multiple sales documents with one sales return, then you can create sales return orders. A sales return order automatically issues the related sales credit memo and other return-related documents, such as a replacement sales order, if needed. For more information, see [Process sales return orders](sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md). -In addition to the original posted sales invoice, you can apply the sales credit memo or sales return order to other sales documents, for example another posted sales invoice because the customer is also returning items delivered with that invoice. +> [!NOTE] +> If a posted sales invoice has not yet been paid, then you can use the **Correct** or **Cancel** functions on the posted sales invoice to reverse transactions. These functions only work for unpaid invoices, and they do not support partial returns or cancellations. For more information, see [Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md). -You can send the posted sales credit memo to the customer to confirm the return or cancellation and communicate that the related value will be reimbursed, for example when the items are returned. +A return or reimbursement may relate to only some of the items or services on the original sales invoice. In that case, you must edit information on the lines on the sales credit memo or sales return order. When you post the sales credit memo or sales return order, the sales documents that are affected by the change are reversed and a refund payment can be created for the customer. For more information, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). The credit memo posting will also revert any item charges that were assigned to the posted document, so that the item's value entries are the same as before the item charge was assigned. > [!NOTE] > The bookkeeping aspects of sales returns, such as the payments to customers as reimbursement, is considered bookkeeping work and not described here. For more information, see [Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md). -## Inventory Costing -To preserve correct inventory valuation, you typically want to put returned items back in inventory at the unit cost that they were sold at, not at their current unit cost. This is referred to as exact cost reversing. +## To create a sales credit memo from a posted sales invoice -Two functions exist to assign exact cost reversing automatically. - -|Function|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function on the **Sales Return Order** page|Copies lines of one or more posted documents to be reversed into the sales return order. For more information, see [To create a sales return order based on one or more posted sales documents](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md#to-create-a-sales-return-order-based-on-one-or-more-posted-sales-documents).| -|**Copy from Document** function in the **Sales Credit Memo** and **Sales Return Order** pages|Copies both the header and lines of one posted document to be reversed.

Requires that the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected on the **Sales & Receivables Setup** page.| - -To assign exact cost reversing manually, you must choose the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on any type of return document line, and then select the number of the original sales entry. This links the sales credit memo or sales return order to the original sales entry and ensures that the item is valued at the original unit cost. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md). - -## To create a sales credit memo from a posted sales invoice -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and the choose the related link. -2. On the **Posted Sales Invoices** page, select the posted sales invoice that you want to reverse, and then choose the **Create Corrective Credit Memo** action. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. +2. On the **Posted Sales Invoices** page, select the posted sales invoice that you want to reverse, choose the **Cancel** action, and then choose the **Create Corrective Credit Memo** action. The sales credit memo header contains some information from the posted sales invoice. You can edit this, for example, with new information that reflects the return agreement. 3. Edit information on the lines according to the agreement, such as the number of returned items or the amount to reimburse. -4. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. +4. Choose the **Prepare** action, amd then choose the **Apply Entries** action. 5. On the **Apply Customer Entries** page, select the line with the posted sales document that you want to apply the sales credit memo to, and then choose the **Applies-to ID** action. The identifier of the sales credit memo displays in the **Applies-to ID** field. @@ -61,101 +48,25 @@ For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inv At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** page, you can see the total amount to apply to reverse all involved entries, namely when the value in the **Balance** field is zero. 7. Choose the **OK** button. When you post the sales credit memo, it is applied to the posted sales documents. - After you create or edit sales credit memo lines, and the single or multiple applications are specified, you can post the sales credit memo. -8. Choose the **Post and Send** action. + After you create or edit sales credit memo lines, and the single or multiple applications are specified, you can post the sales credit memo. +8. Choose the **Posting** action, then choose the **Post and Send** action. The **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box opens showing the preferred sending method for the customer. You can change the sending method by choosing the lookup button for the **Send Document** to field. For more information, see [Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). The posted sales documents that you applied the credit memo to are now reversed, and a refund payment can be created for the customer. The sales credit memo is removed and replaced with a new document in the list of posted sales credit memos. ## To create a sales credit memo by copying a posted sales invoice + 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty sales credit memo. -3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. -4. Choose the **Copy from Document** action. +3. In the **Customer Name** field, enter the name of an existing customer. +4. Choose the **Prepare** action, then choose the **Copy Document** action. 5. On the **Copy Sales Document** page, in the **Document Type** field, select **Posted Invoice**. -6. Choose the **Document No.** field to open the **Posted Sales Invoices** page, and then select the posted sales invoice that contains lines that you want to reverse. +6. Choose the **Document No.** field to open the **Posted Sales Invoices** page, and then select the posted sales invoice record that contains lines that you want to reverse. 7. Select the **Recalculate Lines** check box if you want the copied posted sales invoice lines to be updated with any changes in item price and unit cost since the invoice was posted. 8. Choose the **OK** button. The copied invoice lines are inserted in the sales credit memo. 9. Complete the sales credit memo as explained in [To create a sales credit memo from a posted sales invoice](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md#to-create-a-sales-credit-memo-from-a-posted-sales-invoice). -## To create a sales return order based on one or more posted sales documents -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as necessary. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill the lines manually, or copy information from other documents to fill the lines automatically: - - - Use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to copy one or more posted document lines from one or more posted documents. This function always exactly reverses the costs from the posted document line. This function is described in the following steps. - - Use the **Copy from Document** function to copy an existing document to the return order. Use this function to copy the entire document. It can be either a posted document or a document that is not yet posted. This function only enables exact cost reversing when the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected on the **Sales and Receivables Setup** page. - -5. Choose the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** action. -6. At the top of the **Posted Sales Document Lines** page, select the **Show Reversible Lines Only** check box if you want to see only lines that have quantities that have not yet been returned. For example, if a posted sales invoice quantity has already been returned, you may not want to return that quantity on a new sales return document. - - > [!NOTE] - > This field only works for posted shipments and posted invoice lines, not for posted return or posted credit memo lines. - - At the left side of the page, the different document types are listed, and the number in brackets shows the number of documents available of each document type. - -7. In the **Document Type Filter** field, select the type of posted document lines you would like to use. -8. Select the lines that you would like to copy to the new document. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you use Ctrl+A to select all lines, all lines within the filter you have set are copied, but the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** filter is ignored. For example, suppose you have filtered the lines to a particular document number with two lines, one of which has already been returned. Even if the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** field is selected, if you press Ctrl+A to copy all lines, both lines are copied, instead of only the one that has not yet been reversed. - -9. Choose the **OK** button to copy the lines to the new document. - - The following processes occur: - - - For posted document lines of the type **Item**, a new document line is created that is a copy of the posted document line, with the quantity that has not yet been reversed. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is filled in as appropriate with the number of the item ledger entry of the posted document line. - - - For posted document lines that are not of the type **Item**, such as item charges, a new document line is created that is a copy of the original posted document line. - - - Calculates the **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the new line from the costs on the corresponding item ledger entries. - - - If the copied document is a posted shipment, posted receipt, posted return receipt, or posted return shipment, the unit price is calculated automatically from the item card. - - - If the copied document is a posted invoice or credit memo, the unit price, invoice discounts, and line discounts from the posted document line are copied. - - - If the posted document line contains item tracking lines, the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on the item tracking lines is filled with the appropriate item ledger entry numbers from the posted item tracking lines. - - When you copy from a posted invoice or posted credit memo, application copies any relevant invoice discounts and line discounts as valid at the time of posting that document from the posted document line to the new document line. Be aware, however, that if the **Calc. Inv. Discount** option is activated on the **Sales & Receivables Setup** page, then the invoice discount will be newly calculated when you post the new document line. The line amount for the new line may therefore be different than the line amount for the posted document line, depending on the new calculation of the invoice discount. - - > [!NOTE] - > If part of the quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed or sold or consumed, a line is created for only the quantity that remains in inventory or that has not been returned. If the full quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed, a new document line is not created. - > - > If the flow of goods in the posted document is the same as the flow of goods in the new document, a copy of the original posted document line in the new document is created. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is not filled in because, in this case, exact cost reversing is not possible. For example, if you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to get a posted sales credit memo line for a new sales credit memo, only the original posted credit memo line is copied to the new credit memo. - -10. On the **Sales Return Order** page, in the **Return Reason Code** field on each line, select the reason for the return. -11. Choose the **post** action. - -## To create a replacement sales order from a sales return order -You may decide to compensate a customer for an item that you have sold them by replacing the item. You can make a replacement with the same item or a different item. This situation could occur if you mistakenly shipped the wrong item to the customer, for example. - -1. On the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process, on an empty line, make a negative entry for the replacement item by inserting a negative amount in the **Quantity** field. -2. Choose the **Move Negative Lines** action. -3. On the **Move Negative Sales Lines** page, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The negative line for the replacement item is deleted from the sales return order and inserted in a new **Sales Order** page. For more information, see [Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -## To create return-related documents from a sales return order -You can have replacement sales orders, purchase return orders, and replacement purchase orders created automatically during the sales return process. This is useful, for example, in situations where you want to handle items with warranties provided by vendors. - -1. On the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process, choose the **Create Return-Related Documents** action. -2. In the **Vendor No.** field, enter the number of a vendor if you want to create vendor documents automatically. -3. If a returned item must be returned to the vendor, select the **Create Purch. Ret. Order** check box. -4. If a returned item must be ordered from the vendor, select the **Create Purchase Order** check box. -5. If a replacement sales order must be created, select the **Create Sales Order** check box. - -## To create a restock charge -You may decide to charge your customer a restock fee to cover the physical handling costs of returning an item. This could occur if the customer mistakenly ordered the wrong item or changed their mind after receiving the item you sold them, for example. - -You can post this increased cost as an item charge in a credit memo or a return order and assign it to the posted shipment. The following describes it for a sales return order, but the same steps apply to a sales credit memo. - -1. Open the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process. -2. On a new line, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -3. Fill in the fields as for any item charge line. For more information, see [Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). - -When you post the sales return order, the restock charge is added to the relevant sales entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. - ## To create a sales allowance You can send a customer a credit memo with a price reduction if the customer has received slightly damaged items or received the items late. You can post this reduced price as an item charge in a credit memo or a return order and assign it to the posted shipment. The following describes it for a sales credit memo, but the same steps apply to a sales return order. @@ -164,11 +75,11 @@ You can post this reduced price as an item charge in a credit memo or a return o 2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty sales credit memo. 3. Fill in the credit memo header with relevant information about the customer that you want to give the sales allowance to. 4. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -5. In the **No.** field, select the appropriate item charge value. +5. In the **No.** field, select the appropriate item charge value. You may want to create a special item charge number to cover sales allowances. -6. In the **Quantity** field, enter **1**. -7. In the **Unit Price** field, enter the amount of the sales allowance. -8. Assign the sales allowance as an item charge to the items in the posted shipment. For more information, see [Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). When you have assigned the allowance, return to the **Sales Credit Memo** page. +6. In the **Quantity** field, enter **1**. +7. In the **Unit Price Excl. Tax** field, enter the amount of the sales allowance. +8. Assign the sales allowance as an item charge to the items in the posted shipment. For more information, see [Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). When you have assigned the allowance, return to the **Sales Credit Memo** page. When you post the sales return order, the sales allowance is added to the relevant sales entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. @@ -183,37 +94,54 @@ To combine return receipts, the **Combine Shipments** check box must be selected ### To manually combine return receipts -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the **New** action. 3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. 4. Choose the **Get Return Receipt Lines** action. 5. Select the return receipt lines that you want to include in the credit memo: - - To insert all lines, select all lines, and then choose the **OK** button. - - - To insert specific lines, select the lines, and then choose the **OK** button. + - To insert all lines, select all lines, and then choose the **OK** button. + - To insert specific lines, select the lines, and then choose the **OK** button. 6. If an incorrect shipment line was selected or you want to start over, you can simply delete the lines on the credit memo and re-run the **Get Return Receipt Lines** function. 7. Post the invoice. -### To automatically combine return receipts +### To automatically combine return receipts + You can automatically combine return receipts and have the option of automatically posting the credit memos using the **Combine Return Receipts** function. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Combine Return Receipts**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Combine Return Receipts**, and then choose the related link. 2. On the **Combine Return Receipts** page, fill in the fields to select the relevant return receipts. 3. Select the **Post Credit Memos** check box. If not, you must manually post the resulting purchase credit memos. -4. Choose the **OK** button. +4. Choose the **OK** button. + +### To remove a received and invoiced return order -### To remove a received and invoiced return order When you invoice return receipts in this way, the return orders from which the return receipts were posted still exist, even if they have been fully received and invoiced. -When return receipts are combined on a credit memo and posted, a posted sales credit memo is created for the credited lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating sales return order is updated based on the invoiced quantity. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Sales Return Orders**, and then select the link. -2. Specify in the **No.** filter field which return orders to delete. -3. Choose the **OK** button. +When return receipts are combined on a credit memo and posted, a posted sales credit memo is created for the credited lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating sales return order is updated based on the invoiced quantity. + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Sales Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. +2. Specify in the **No.** filter field which return orders to delete. +3. Choose the **OK** button. Alternatively, delete individual sales return orders manually. +## Inventory Costing + +To preserve correct inventory valuation, you typically want to put returned items back in inventory at the unit cost that they were sold at, not at their current unit cost. This is referred to as exact cost reversing. + +Two functions exist to assign exact cost reversing automatically: + +|Function|Description| +|------------------|---------------------------------------| +|**Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function on the **Sales Return Order** page|Copies lines of one or more posted documents to be reversed into the sales return order. For more information, see [Create a sales return order based on one or more posted sales documents](sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md#create-a-sales-return-order-based-on-one-or-more-posted-sales-documents).| +|**Copy Document** function in the **Sales Credit Memo** and **Sales Return Order** pages|Copies both the header and lines of one posted document to be reversed.

Requires that the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected on the **Sales & Receivables Setup** page.| + +To assign exact cost reversing manually, you must choose the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on any type of return document line, and then select the number of the original sales entry. This links the sales credit memo or sales return order to the original sales entry and ensures that the item is valued at the original unit cost. + +For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md). + ## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/paths/return-items-dynamics-365-business-central/) ## See Also @@ -226,4 +154,4 @@ Alternatively, delete individual sales return orders manually. [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md b/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..581112262 --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/sales-how-process-sales-returns-orders.md @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +--- +title: Process Sales Return Orders +description: Describes how to create a sales return order to process a return, cancellation, or reimbursement for items or services you have been received payment for. +author: SorenGP + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: undo, credit memo, return, order +ms.date: 09/08/2021 +ms.author: edupont + +--- +# Process Sales Return Orders + +If you need more control of the sales return process, such as warehouse documents for the item handling, or a better overview when receiving items from multiple sales documents with one sales return, then you can create sales return orders. A sales return order automatically issues the related sales credit memo and other return-related documents, such as a replacement sales order, if needed. + +In addition to the original posted sales invoice, you can apply the sales credit memo or sales return order to other sales documents, for example another posted sales invoice because the customer is also returning items delivered with that invoice. + +## Create a sales return order based on one or more posted sales documents + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Sales Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. +2. Choose the **New** action. +3. Fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as necessary. +4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill the lines manually, or copy information from other documents to fill the lines automatically: + + - Use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to copy one or more posted document lines from one or more posted documents. This function always exactly reverses the costs from the posted document line. This function is described in the following steps. + - Use the **Copy from Document** function to copy an existing document to the return order. Use this function to copy the entire document. It can be either a posted document or a document that is not yet posted. This function only enables exact cost reversing when the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected on the **Sales and Receivables Setup** page. + +5. Choose the **Process** action, then choose the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** action. +6. At the top of the **Posted Sales Document Lines** page, select the **Show Reversible Lines Only** check box if you want to see only lines that have quantities that have not yet been returned. For example, if a posted sales invoice quantity has already been returned, you may not want to return that quantity on a new sales return document. + + > [!NOTE] + > This field only works for posted shipments and posted invoice lines, not for posted return or posted credit memo lines. + + At the left side of the page, the different document types are listed, and the number in brackets shows the number of documents available of each document type. + +7. In the **Document Type Filter** field, select the type of posted document lines you would like to use. +8. Select the lines that you would like to copy to the new document. + + > [!NOTE] + > If you use Ctrl+A to select all lines, all lines within the filter you have set are copied, but the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** filter is ignored. For example, suppose you have filtered the lines to a particular document number with two lines, one of which has already been returned. Even if the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** field is selected, if you press Ctrl+A to copy all lines, both lines are copied, instead of only the one that has not yet been reversed. + +9. Choose the **OK** button to copy the lines to the new document. + + The following processes occur: + + - For posted document lines of the type **Item**, a new document line is created that is a copy of the posted document line, with the quantity that has not yet been reversed. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is filled in as appropriate with the number of the item ledger entry of the posted document line. + + - For posted document lines that are not of the type **Item**, such as item charges, a new document line is created that is a copy of the original posted document line. + + - Calculates the **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the new line from the costs on the corresponding item ledger entries. + + - If the copied document is a posted shipment, posted receipt, posted return receipt, or posted return shipment, the unit price is calculated automatically from the item card. + + - If the copied document is a posted invoice or credit memo, the unit price, invoice discounts, and line discounts from the posted document line are copied. + + - If the posted document line contains item tracking lines, the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on the item tracking lines is filled with the appropriate item ledger entry numbers from the posted item tracking lines. + + When you copy from a posted invoice or posted credit memo, application copies any relevant invoice discounts and line discounts as valid at the time of posting that document from the posted document line to the new document line. Be aware, however, that if the **Calc. Inv. Discount** option is activated on the **Sales & Receivables Setup** page, then the invoice discount will be newly calculated when you post the new document line. The line amount for the new line may therefore be different than the line amount for the posted document line, depending on the new calculation of the invoice discount. + + > [!NOTE] + > If part of the quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed or sold or consumed, a line is created for only the quantity that remains in inventory or that has not been returned. If the full quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed, a new document line is not created. + > + > If the flow of goods in the posted document is the same as the flow of goods in the new document, a copy of the original posted document line in the new document is created. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is not filled in because, in this case, exact cost reversing is not possible. For example, if you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to get a posted sales credit memo line for a new sales credit memo, only the original posted credit memo line is copied to the new credit memo. + +10. On the **Sales Return Order** page, in the **Return Reason Code** field on each line, select the reason for the return. +11. Choose the **post** action. + +## To create a replacement sales order from a sales return order +You may decide to compensate a customer for an item that you have sold them by replacing the item. You can make a replacement with the same item or a different item. This situation could occur if you mistakenly shipped the wrong item to the customer, for example. + +1. On the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process, on an empty line, make a negative entry for the replacement item by inserting a negative amount in the **Quantity** field. +2. Choose the **Move Negative Lines** action. +3. On the **Move Negative Sales Lines** page, fill in the fields as necessary. +4. Choose the **OK** button. The negative line for the replacement item is deleted from the sales return order and inserted in a new **Sales Order** page. For more information, see [Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). + +## To create return-related documents from a sales return order +You can have replacement sales orders, purchase return orders, and replacement purchase orders created automatically during the sales return process. This is useful, for example, in situations where you want to handle items with warranties provided by vendors. + +1. On the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process, choose the **Create Return-Related Documents** action. +2. In the **Vendor No.** field, enter the number of a vendor if you want to create vendor documents automatically. +3. If a returned item must be returned to the vendor, select the **Create Purch. Ret. Order** check box. +4. If a returned item must be ordered from the vendor, select the **Create Purchase Order** check box. +5. If a replacement sales order must be created, select the **Create Sales Order** check box. + +## To create a restock charge +You may decide to charge your customer a restock fee to cover the physical handling costs of returning an item. This could occur if the customer mistakenly ordered the wrong item or changed their mind after receiving the item you sold them, for example. + +You can post this increased cost as an item charge in a credit memo or a return order and assign it to the posted shipment. The following describes this for a sales return order, but the same steps apply to a sales credit memo. + +1. Open the **Sales Return Order** page for an active return process. +2. On a new line, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. +3. Fill in the fields as for any item charge line. For more information, see [Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). + +When you post the sales return order, the restock charge is added to the relevant sales entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. + +## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/paths/return-items-dynamics-365-business-central/) + +## See Also + +[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) +[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) +[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) +[Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) +[Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md) +[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) + + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/sales-how-register-new-customers.md b/business-central/sales-how-register-new-customers.md index a1e2f14ff..3a2684e55 100644 --- a/business-central/sales-how-register-new-customers.md +++ b/business-central/sales-how-register-new-customers.md @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: client, customer, credit -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/24/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -22,23 +22,16 @@ Before you can register new customers, you must set up various sales codes that > [!VIDEO https://www.microsoft.com/videoplayer/embed/RE3PZsM] ## Adding new customers +You can add new customers manually, by filling out the fields on the **Customer Card** page, or you can use templates that contain predefined information. For example, you can create a templates for different types of customer profiles. Using templates saves time when adding new customers, and helps ensure that the information is correct each time. If you create templates for more than one type of customer, you can choose the template to use when you add a customer. If you create only one template it will be used for all new customers. After you create a template, you can use the **Apply Template** action to apply it to one or more selected customers. To create a template, you fill in the information that you want to reuse on the Customer Card page, and then save it as a template. For more information, see [To save the customer card as a template](sales-how-register-new-customers.md#to-save-the-customer-card-as-a-template) -To register a new customer, you must fill in a customer card. You can establish templates for different customer profiles, or you can add customers without templates. You can also create a customer from a contact. For more information, see [To create a customer, vendor, employee, or bank account from a contact](marketing-create-contact-companies.md#to-create-a-customer-vendor-employee-or-bank-account-from-a-contact). +> [!TIP] +> It can be helpful to personalize the **Customer Template** page when you create a template. For example, you might want to add the **Credit Limit** field to a template. For more information, see [Personalize Your Workspace](/dynamics365/business-central/ui-personalization-user#to-start-personalizing-a-page-through-the-personalizing-banner). -> [!NOTE] -> If customer templates exist for different customer types, then a page appears when you create a new customer card from where you can select an appropriate template. If only one customer template exists, then new customer cards always use that template. +You can also create a customer from a contact. For more information, see [To create a customer, vendor, employee, or bank account from a contact](marketing-create-contact-companies.md#to-create-a-customer-vendor-employee-or-bank-account-from-a-contact). ### To create a new customer card -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Customers** page, choose the **New** action. - - If only one customer template exists, then a new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. - - If more than one customer template exists, then a page opens from which you can select a customer template. In that case, follow the next two steps. -3. On the **Select a template for a new customer** page, choose the template that you want to use for the new customer card. -4. Choose the **OK** button. A new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the customer card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] +[!INCLUDE[create_new_customer](includes/create_new_customer.md)] The **Prices & Discounts** action provides options for managing special prices or discounts for the customer when an order meets certain criteria. For example, the criteria might be when they're purchasing a certain item, ordering a minimum quantity, or buying before a date, such as when a campaign ends. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). diff --git a/business-central/sales-how-sell-products.md b/business-central/sales-how-sell-products.md index b35a73c34..c0738c88d 100644 --- a/business-central/sales-how-sell-products.md +++ b/business-central/sales-how-sell-products.md @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: trade, partial deliveries, customer sales order -ms.date: 08/17/2021 +ms.date: 09/24/2021 ms.author: edupont --- @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ You can even create directly-paid orders for non-registered customers by first s 8. In the **Line Discount %** field, enter a percentage if you want to grant the customer a discount on the product. The value in the **Line Amount** field is updated accordingly. If you have set up special item prices on the **Sales Prices and Sales Line Discounts** FastTab on the customer or item card, then the price and amount on the quote line are automatically updated if the agreed price criteria are met. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -9. To add a comment about the quote line that the customer can see on the printed sales quote, write a comment in the **Description** field on an empty line. -10. Repeat steps 4 through 8 for every item that you want to sell to the customer. +9. To add a comment about the order line that the customer can see on the printed sales order, write a comment in the **Description** field on an empty line. +10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for every item that you want to sell to the customer. The totals fields under the lines are automatically updated as you create or modify lines to display the amounts that will be posted to the ledgers. diff --git a/business-central/sales-how-to-set-up-customer-price-groups.md b/business-central/sales-how-to-set-up-customer-price-groups.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12962982a --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/sales-how-to-set-up-customer-price-groups.md @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +--- +title: Set Up Customer Price Groups +description: Learn how to set up customer price groups and create sales prices for those groups. +author: jill-kotel-andersson + +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: customer price groups, discounts, sales prices +ms.date: 09/30/2021 +ms.author: a-jillk + +--- + +# Set Up Customer Price Groups + +Sales prices can be made dependent on the customer groups to which you sell. These are called customer price groups. + +Before you set up customer price groups, you must decide how many groups you want and which customers will belong to each group. + +## How to create sales prices for a group of customers + +When you have agreed on the prices that the group of customers will pay for certain items, you register the agreement for the individual items on the lines in the **Sales Prices** page. + +### To create sales prices for a group of customers + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customer Price Groups**, and then choose the related link. + +2. Select the line for the customer price group. If a line does not already exist you can create a new line. Select **New** to create a new entity and give it a name. + + For the selected line, verify the contents of the fields **Allow Line Disc.**, **Allow Invoice Disc.**, **Price Includes Tax** and **Tax Bus. Posting Gr. (Price)**. + +3. Select the **Navigate** action, and choose **Sales Prices**. The **Sales Prices** page opens. The **Sales Type** field will be filled in with **Customer Price Group**. + +4. Fill in the **Sales Code** with the sales code you selected on the previous page. + +5. Fill in the fields on the lines with the **Item No.**, **Unit of Measure Code**, and the agreed **Unit Price**. You can also show the **Variant Code** column and specify the **Variant Code** if there are several variants of the item. + +6. If the customer group needs to purchase a minimum quantity in order to gain the price agreed on, fill in the **Minimum Quantity** field. + +7. If required, enter the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** of the price agreement. + +8. If relevant, you can also specify the **Currency Code**. + +Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each item that you want to create a Sales Price for. + +## How to enter customer price group codes on customer cards + +After you have set up the customer price groups, you can enter the customer price group codes on the customer cards. + +### To enter customer price group codes on a customer card + +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. + +2. Open the relevant **Customer Card** for a customer that you want to be part of a customer price group. + +3. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, in the **Customer Price Group** field, select the **Customer Price Group** code. + + +## See Also + +[Record Special Sales Prices and Discounts](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md) + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/sales-setup-sales.md b/business-central/sales-setup-sales.md index 606c3d6cb..1ea997e34 100644 --- a/business-central/sales-setup-sales.md +++ b/business-central/sales-setup-sales.md @@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ ms.author: edupont # Setting Up Sales Before you can manage sales processes, you must configure the rules and values that define the company's sales policies. -You must define the general setup, such as which sales documents are required and how their values are posted. This general setup is typically performed once during the initial implementation. +You must define the general setup on the **Sales & Receivables** page, such as which sales documents are required, how their values are posted, and the type of lines to create by default. This general setup is typically performed once during the initial implementation. -A separate series of tasks related to registering new customers is to record any special price or discount agreements that you have with each customer. +A separate series of tasks related to registering new customers is to record any special price or discount agreements that you have with each customer. For more information, see [Record Special Sales Prices and Discounts](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). Finance-related sales setup, such as payment methods and currencies, are covered in the Finance Setup section. For more information, see [Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md). diff --git a/business-central/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md b/business-central/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md index d2606dd02..1bcd4dffc 100644 --- a/business-central/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md +++ b/business-central/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md @@ -21,12 +21,12 @@ After you have created a service order or service quote, registered service item To track changes and get a graphical view of your service business, use [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] statistics tools for quick, automatically generated charting and analysis. ## To work on a service task -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 1.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. 2. If you want a list of service tasks a certain resource or resource group is allocated to, fill in the **Resource Filter** or **Resource Group Filter** field and press Enter. 3. If you want a list of service tasks with a certain response date or response dates within a certain time period, fill in the **Response Date Filter** field and press Enter. 4. If you want a list of service tasks with a certain allocation status or repair status, fill in the **Allocation Status Filter** or **Repair Status Code Filter** field and press Enter. 5. Select the service task you want to work on. Choose the **Item Worksheet** action. The **Service Item Worksheet** page opens. -6. Register standard texts, spare parts, resource hours, and costs as appropriate using the corresponding options in the **Type** field: , **Item**, **Resource**, and **Cost**. +6. Register standard texts, spare parts, resource hours, and costs as appropriate using the corresponding options in the **Type** field: \, **Item**, **Resource**, and **Cost**. 7. In the **Repair Status** field, select the appropriate status. > [!NOTE] @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ To track changes and get a graphical view of your service business, use [!INCLUD ## To register service operations When performing a service on a service order, you can register the details specifying the items used, costs incurred, and the time spent. The data you specify is stored on the **Service Item Worksheet** page. You can update the data when necessary. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 2.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. 2. Open the service order to register the service for, and choose the item line. 3. Choose the **Service Item Worksheet** action 4. On the lines, specify the items used, costs incurred, and the time spent on the service. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ When performing a service on a service order, you can register the details speci ## To register spare parts When working on service items in service orders, you may need to use spare parts for the service. The following procedure shows how to register the spare parts you use on the **Service Item Worksheet** page. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 3.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. 3. Enter a new service line. 4. In the **Type** field, choose **Item**. @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ When working on service items in service orders, you may need to use spare parts You can use a similar procedure to register the spare parts on the **Service Lines** page, which you can open from the **Service Order** page. ## To register spare parts from a service order -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 4.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. 2. Open the service order you want to register spare parts for. 3. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item. Choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. 4. enter a new service line. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ When working on service items in service orders, you may need to use spare parts ## To replace a service item or a service item component When you service a service item that is composed of components, you may need to replace a faulty component with a new one. Every time that you enter a spare part for a service item with components, you have the option of replacing a component or creating a new one. The new item is not registered as a component of the service item until you post this service line or the service order. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 5.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the line that includes the service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. 3. Enter a new service line. 4. In the **Type** field, choose **Item**. @@ -83,14 +83,14 @@ When you service a service item that is composed of components, you may need to ## To change the response time for a service item line When you register a service item line in a service order or quote, depending on whether the service item is on a service contract the response time in hours is automatically entered and the response date and time are calculated accordingly. You can change the response time in hours and the response date and time if you need to. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders** or **Service Quotes**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 6.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Orders** or **Service Quotes**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the service order or quote to open the card. 3. On the service item line you want to change the response time for, either in the **Response Time (Hours)** field or in the **Response Date** and **Response Time** fields, enter the new response hours or response date and time. ## To register fault/resolution codes After repairing a service item, you can register both the fault code and the resolution code for the item by selecting a combination from the existing fault/resolution codes relationships. The fault and resolution codes will appear in the corresponding fields on the **Service Item Worksheet** page. You can also register the codes directly in this page. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. +1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature 7.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. 2. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. 3. On the **Service Item Worksheet** page, choose **Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships**. The **Fault/Resolution Codes Relationships** page opens. diff --git a/business-central/setup.md b/business-central/setup.md index bc8fde329..86107333a 100644 --- a/business-central/setup.md +++ b/business-central/setup.md @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ ms.author: edupont --- # Overview of Tasks to Set Up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] -[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit the needs of your organization. +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit the needs of your organization. The [Business Central quick start](quick-start-business-central.md) articles can help you take the first steps into making [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] your own. This article provides an overview of how you can configure [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] for your organization. For example, your chart of accounts is prefilled with a number of posting accounts ready for use. You can, of course, change the chart of accounts to suit your needs. For more information, see [Finance](finance.md). @@ -73,6 +73,7 @@ Some areas require you to be an administrator in your [!INCLUDE[prod_short](incl [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) [Creating New Companies in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](about-new-company.md) [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) ## [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/free_trial_md.md)] diff --git a/business-central/ui-extensions-install-uninstall.md b/business-central/ui-extensions-install-uninstall.md index 7ed14fc2a..0f61383a6 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-extensions-install-uninstall.md +++ b/business-central/ui-extensions-install-uninstall.md @@ -72,9 +72,16 @@ Microsoft provides the following extensions: * [The GetAddress.io UK Postcodes Extension](LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/ui-extensions-getaddressio.md) * [US/CA/UK/AU/NZ/ZA - Send Remittance Advice](ui-extensions-send-remittance-advice.md) + +## Uploading a Per-Tenant Extension (PTE) + +You upload a PTE by using the **Extension Management** page. On the **Extension Management** page, go to **Manage**, then choose **Upload Extension**. On the **Upload and Deploy Extension** page, specify the .app file to upload. To proceed, choose the **Accept** button, and then the **Deploy** button, this will start the process of deploying the PTE. + +If the PTE contains breaking schema changes, it is possible to *force* an upload of it. To do that, in the **Schema Sync Mode** choose the **Force** option. You will get a confirmation dialog to accept before proceeding. + ## Uninstalling an Extension -You uninstall an extension using the **Extension Management** page. If you uninstall an extension, and you then change your mind, you can install the extension again. When you uninstall an extension that you have been using, data is by default preserved so that if you install the extension again. You can instead choose to delete the data with the extension. This is controlled by the **Delete Extension Data** checkbox. By default, this checkbox is *not enabled*. +You uninstall an extension by using the **Extension Management** page. If you uninstall an extension, and you then change your mind, you can install the extension again. When you uninstall an extension that you have been using, data is by default preserved so that if you install the extension again. You can instead choose to delete the data with the extension. This is controlled by the **Delete Extension Data** checkbox. By default, this checkbox is *not enabled*. > [!IMPORTANT] > If you enable the **Delete Extension Data** checkbox, you will get a confirmation dialog and you must choose **OK**. With the **Delete Extension Data** checkbox enabled, you can now uninstall the extension, and you will be asked to reconfirm that you want to uninstall the extension and delete the data. The action cannot be undone. diff --git a/business-central/ui-extensions.md b/business-central/ui-extensions.md index b0ccace3a..2a97b7b4c 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-extensions.md +++ b/business-central/ui-extensions.md @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Some extensions are provided by Microsoft, and other extensions are provided by ## Extensions and data transfer -As the following extensions are communicating with other services they may transfer data out of the geography of the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] environment: +Because the following extensions communicate with other services, they might transfer data out of the geography of the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] environment: * AMC Banking 365 Fundamentals Extension * Image Analyzer @@ -73,6 +73,12 @@ This also applies to some functionality in the base application, such as the fol * Online Map * EU VAT Reg. No. Service +## Recommended Apps +Microsoft partners and resellers can create an extensions that they can use to compile lists of apps that they often recommend to their customers. If they do, and have deployed the extension to your tenant, the apps will be available on the **Recommended Apps** page. There you can read about each app and decide whether to install them. + +> [!NOTE] +> If you are a Microsoft partner or reseller, and you're interested in providing a list of recommended apps, see [Recommend Apps from AppSource](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/administration/recommend-apps). + ## See Also [Customize Business Central](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/business-central/ui-fonts.md b/business-central/ui-fonts.md index 61683df29..dcd9ee4a1 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-fonts.md +++ b/business-central/ui-fonts.md @@ -61,6 +61,6 @@ For more information, see [Barcode Fonts with Business Central Online](/dynamics [Managing Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) [Select a Check Layout](finance-how-define-check-layouts.md) [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Barcode Fonts with Business Central Online](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/developer/devenv-report-barcode-fonts.md) +[Barcode Fonts with Business Central Online](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/developer/devenv-report-barcode-fonts) [!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/ui-get-ready-business.md b/business-central/ui-get-ready-business.md index 76496cd57..a3ac38f00 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-get-ready-business.md +++ b/business-central/ui-get-ready-business.md @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365, setup, wizard, experience -ms.date: 04/01/2021 +ms.date: 09/29/2021 ms.author: edupont --- # Getting Ready for Doing Business @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ You can also find the list of assisted setup guides if you choose the ![Lightbul ## Get started -Starting with 2021 release wave 1, when you sign in for the first time or launch a new company, the **Get Started** checklist takes you through the steps to make you ready for business. The steps vary depending on your country and any industry-specific functionality that you have added to your [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +When you sign in for the first time or launch a new company, the **Get Started** checklist takes you through the steps to make you ready for business. The steps vary depending on your country and any industry-specific functionality that you have added to your [!INCLUDE [prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. Starting with 2021 release wave 2, when you first sign in to the CRONUS demonstration company, your home page is optimized for your first experiences. If you prefer to see more links to more pages, just switch to the Business Manager role. For more information, see [Change Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md). Once you have migrated data, such as vendors, customers, and items from your existing financial system, you are ready to begin. But depending on your needs, consider if other assisted setup guides on the list can help you. @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ If an area is not covered by an assisted setup, choose the ![Sprocket icon to op > > The first time you sign in, you use the **Essential** experience. For more information, see [Change Which Features are Displayed](ui-experiences.md). -When you have run an assisted setup guide, it is marked as **Completed**. +When you have run an assisted setup guide, it is marked as **Completed**. ## Teaching tips and tours @@ -75,13 +75,18 @@ When users are created in Microsoft 365, they can be imported into the **Users** ## Next steps -Based on your migrated data, you can now proceed to create new sales or purchase documents. Use the **Actions** section of your home page to quickly create a new sales quote, sales invoice, sales order, purchase invoice, or payment registration. +Based on your migrated data, you can now proceed to create new sales or purchase documents. Use the **Actions** section of your home page to quickly create a new sales quote, sales invoice, sales order, purchase invoice, or payment registration. Check out the [quick start](quick-start-business-central.md) articles to help you take the first steps. ## See also +[Business Central Quick Starts](quick-start-business-central.md) [Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) +[Change Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md) +[Accessibility and Keyboard Shortcuts](ui-accessibility.md) +[Trials and Subscriptions](across-preview.md) +[Business Functionality](across-business-functionality.md) [Assign Permissions to Users and Groups](ui-define-granular-permissions.md) -[[!INCLUDE[prod_long](includes/prod_long.md)] Trials and Subscriptions](across-preview.md) +[Search in the help pane](product-help-and-support.md#search-in-the-help-pane) [Resources for Help and Support](product-help-and-support.md) [Microsoft Learn site](/learn/dynamics365/business-central?WT.mc_id=dyn365bc_landingpage-docs) diff --git a/business-central/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md b/business-central/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md index 6e6fb2940..504da0b60 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md +++ b/business-central/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ The following procedure is based on a sales order. The steps are similar for all A PDF file with the current content of the sales order is added to the **Attachments** tab in the FactBox. ## To add a link from an item card -You can add a link from a card or document to any URL or path. This is useful, for example, when you want to link an item card with the supplier's item catalog. +You can add a link from a card or document to any URL. This is useful, for example, when you want to link an item card with the supplier's item catalog. The following procedure is based on an item card. The steps are similar for all other supported cards and documents. @@ -97,4 +97,4 @@ The note is now attached to the sales order. [Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) -[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] diff --git a/business-central/ui-how-send-documents-email.md b/business-central/ui-how-send-documents-email.md index 1ffd278be..0e8332737 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-how-send-documents-email.md +++ b/business-central/ui-how-send-documents-email.md @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ ms.author: edupont --- # Send Documents and Emails -You can easily share information and documents, such as sales and purchase orders and invoices, by email directly from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]], without having to open an email app. +You can easily share information and documents, such as sales and purchase orders and invoices, by email directly from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], without having to open an email app. You can send almost all types of documents as PDF attachments. Alternatively, you can set up a report layout that includes information from the document in the email text, along with text that makes the email more friendly, for example, a standard greeting. For more information, see [Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md). @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ To enable emails from within [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], sta This procedure describes how attach a posted sales invoice to an email as a PDF file, and with document-specific email text. 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the invoice, and then choose the **Print/Send** action. +2. Select the invoice, choose the **Print/Send** action, and then choose **Send**. 3. In the **Email** field, choose **Yes (Prompt for Settings)**. For more information, see [Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). If the **Email** field on the **Send Document to** page is set to **Yes (Prompt for Settings)**, then the **Send Email** page opens pre-filled with the contact person in the **To:** field and the document attached as a PDF file. In the **Body** field, you can either enter text manually or you can have the field filled with a document-specific email body that you have set up. @@ -47,9 +47,10 @@ This procedure describes how attach a posted sales invoice to an email as a PDF > If you do not want to specify email settings each time you email a document, you can select the **Yes (Use Default Settings)** option in the **Email** field on the **Send Document to** page. In that case, the **Send Email** page will not open. See Step 4. For more information, see [Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). ## To compose and send an email +You can quickly compose emails for contacts, customers, vendors, salespeople/purchasers, and bank accounts directly from the pages for those entities. Just choose **Process**, and then **Send Email** to open the email editor. For bank accounts, the **Send Email** action is under **Actions**. -1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Email Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the account to send the email from, and then choose the **Compose Email** action. +> [!TIP] +> If you often send email messages that are similar in nature, or want to send a bulk communication, for example, to advertise a sales campaign, using Word templates with email can speed up the process. You can create a template for an entities such as customers, vendors, and contacts, that will generate the content of an email message for you, and even personalize the content for the recipient based on data in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For more information, see [Using Word Templates for Bulk Communication](ui-mail-merge.md). ## Documents marked as printed when they are sent diff --git a/business-central/ui-mail-merge.md b/business-central/ui-mail-merge.md index a39089d34..a2ee9439d 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-mail-merge.md +++ b/business-central/ui-mail-merge.md @@ -15,28 +15,50 @@ ms.author: bholtorf --- # Using Word Templates for Bulk Communication -Microsoft Word templates can make it easier to mass communicate with entities such as customers and vendors. For example, you can create brochures to alert customers about a sales campaign, letters to inform vendors about a new purchasing policy, or invitations to attract contacts to an upcoming event. +Microsoft Word templates can make it easier to mass communicate in print or email with entities such as contacts, customers, and vendors. For example, you can create brochures to alert customers about a sales campaign, letters to inform vendors about a new purchasing policy, or invitations to attract contacts to an upcoming event. > [!NOTE] > You can use Word templates only on devices with Microsoft Word 2019 and the Windows operating system installed. You can use entities in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] as the data source for the template, and add merge fields to personalize documents for each entity. The merge fields come from the entity in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. When you apply a Word template to an entity, data from the merge fields is inserted in the document. -On the **Word Templates** page, you can use an assisted setup guide to download a ZIP file that contains a DataSource.txt and a Word template file for an entity. After you set up the template and add merge fields, you use the same guide to upload the template. You can only use the Word template and data source files that you download from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], and you must store the files in the same location. +On the **Word Templates** page, when you create a new template you use an assisted setup guide to download a ZIP file that contains a DataSource.xlsx and a Word template file for the entity. The data source file provides the fields that you can use in the template. Do not edit the data source file. You can only use the Word template and data source files that you download from [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)], and you must store the files in the same location. -> [!NOTE] -> When you choose an entity for which to create a template, the list shows all entities in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. However, you cannot create templates for all entities. If the name of an entity contains special characters, such as **/**, **.**, **_**, or **-**, you cannot create a template for it. The name of the entity is shown in the **Object Caption** column. +After you set up the template and add merge fields, you use the same guide to upload the template. -When you are setting up the template in Word, on the **Mailings** tab you can add merge fields by choosing **Insert Merge Field**. +## Setting Up the Template in Word +When you are setting up a template in Word, on the **Mailings** tab you can add merge fields by choosing **Insert Merge Field**. The merge fields that are available come from the data source file that you downloaded for the entity. They act as placeholders that tell Word where in the document to put the information about the entity. -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot use merge fields if the name of the field contains 40 characters or more. For example, you cannot use the Company__Information_Customs_Permit_Date field because it has 40 characters. +:::image type="content" source="media/word-tmpl-merge-field.PNG" alt-text="Adding merge fields in Microsoft Word"::: + +## Adding Related Entities +In addition to adding data for the source entity, that is, the entity for which you're creating the template, you can also merge data from entities that are related to it. For example, if the source is the Customer entity, you can also merge data from fields on the Customer/Purchaser entity because both the entities have a field in common. -When your Word template is ready, on the **Word Templates** page you can choose **Apply** to generate the documents. You can either create one document that contains sections for each entity, or split the operation to create a new document for each entity. +Related entities share a field, which is often an identifier such as a name, code, or ID, with the source entity. When you set up a template there are simple and advanced options for choosing related entities: -## To create a Word template +* Simple - Add known relations that [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] makes available by default. +* Advanced - Add non-standard relations, such as those that have been added by extensions or customizations. This requires that you know the fields that the entities share. + +When you add a related entity, you must specify a prefix for the field name. When you're adding fields to the template, the prefix can make it easier to distinguish between fields from the source entity and fields from related entities. + +## To create a Word template in Business Central 1. Choose the ![Lightbulb that opens the Tell Me feature.](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Tell me what you want to do") icon, enter **Word Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Follow the steps in the assisted setup guide. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] +2. Choose **New**, then **Create a Template**, and then follow the steps in the assisted setup guide. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] + +> [!TIP] +> You can also create a template directly from the page for an entity by choosing the **Apply Word Template** action to open the assisted setup guide, and then **New Template**. When you do, the data source is chosen for you based on the type of entity. + +## Applying a template +When your Word template is ready, on the **Word Templates** page you can choose **Apply** to generate the documents. When you apply a Word template to an entity, data from the merge fields is inserted in the document. You can either create one document that contains sections for each entity, or choose **Split** to create a new document for each entity. + +You can apply templates to one or more of the same type of entity, such as a contact, directly in the context of that page, or from the Word Templates page to apply the template to all of the entities of that type. + +## Using Word Templates with Email +You can use Word templates to add content to email messages. When you compose an email, you can choose the **Use Word Template** action to apply the content of a template to the message. This requires that you have created one or more template for the entity. You can use one template at a time, and when you switch between templates the message changes to reflect the content from the chosen template. + +Additionally, you can use the **Add File from Word Template** action to attach the content of the template to the email as a file. The file will use the format you specified for the template output. + +:::image type="content" source="media/email-word-tmpl.PNG" alt-text="Options for using content from a Word template in an email"::: ## See Also [Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) diff --git a/business-central/ui-role-explorer.md b/business-central/ui-role-explorer.md index 376b04d70..aad466eb6 100644 --- a/business-central/ui-role-explorer.md +++ b/business-central/ui-role-explorer.md @@ -1,48 +1,95 @@ --- title: Exploring and Navigating Pages per Role description: You can get an overview of all the business features that are available for your role, and for other roles, with the Role Explorer. -author: SorenGP - +author: jswymer ms.service: dynamics365-business-central ms.topic: conceptual ms.devlang: na ms.tgt_pltfrm: na ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 06/24/2021 -ms.author: edupont - +ms.search.keywords: role explorer, find features, navigate +ms.date: 08/01/2021 +ms.author: jswymer --- # Finding Pages with the Role Explorer + You can get an overview of all the business features that are available for your role, and for other roles if you go a step further. In the following documentation, this feature overview is referred to as the *role explorer*. Each element on the role explorer is an action that opens a page. Accordingly, you can also use the role explorer as a means to navigate in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +## Open the role explorer + You can open the role explorer from the Role Center and all list pages and from the **Tell Me** window. - On your Role Center or any list page, choose the ![Menu button.](media/ui_menu_button.png "Menu button") button to the right of the navigation bar, or press Shift+F12. - In the **Tell Me** window, choose the **exploring** action at the bottom. +When you first open the role center, it shows links to most features available for your role. + +## Navigate features + +The actions that open pages are organized under nodes named after the features or application areas. Each node can be collapsed or expanded individually and you can collapse/expand all nodes together. + +- To expand/collapse an individual node, choose the node. This applies to top-level nodes and sub nodes. +- To expand/collapse all top-level nodes on the page, but leave the sub-nodes as they are, choose **...** at the top, then choose **Expand** or **Collapse**. +- To expand/collapse all top-levels node and all sub nodes under it, choose **...** at the top, then choose the **Expand All** or **Collapse All** action. + +## Search for features + +To quickly locate features, select **Find**, then enter a word or phrase for the feature your trying to find. The role center will highlight any matching text. If a feature is hidden from view in collapsed node, the collapsed node is marked with a dot. + +## Explore other roles + +To explore roles other than your own, select **Explore more roles**. The role center displays each role under its own heading, with links to its features. You can then navigate and find features just like you do when exploring your role. + +> [!NOTE] +> You'll only see roles that are set up to show in the role explorer. So if you don't see a role that you expected to see, it's probably not set up for it. For more information, see [Manage Profiles](admin-users-profiles-roles.md). + +When exploring other roles, you can also narrow the exploration down by using the **Report & Analysis** and **Administration** actions at the top of the role center. + +- **Report & Analysis** shows only those features that are categorized as reports and analysis features. +- **Administration** shows only those features that are categorized as administration features. + +> [!TIP] +> For developers, you categorize pages and reports by setting the [UsageCategory property](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/developer/properties/devenv-usagecategory-property) in the object's AL code. + + +## Expand and collapse nodes on the role explorer -## To expand/collapse nodes on the role explorer The actions that open pages are organized under nodes named after the features or application areas. Each node can be collapsed or expanded individually and you can collapse/expand all nodes together. - To expand/collapse a node, choose the node. This applies to top-level nodes and sub nodes. - To expand/collapse all top-level nodes on the page, choose the **Expand** or **Collapse** action in the top-right corner. - To expand/collapse all top-levels node and all sub nodes under it, do one of the following steps: - - Press the Ctrl+Shift keys while you choose the **Expand** or **Collapse** action in the top-right corner. - - Choose **...** in the top-right corner, then choose the **Expand All** or **Collapse All** action. + - Press the Ctrl+Shift keys while you choose the **Expand** or **Collapse** action in the top-right corner. + - Choose **...** in the top-right corner, then choose the **Expand All** or **Collapse All** action. ## See Also [Finding Pages and Information with Tell Me](ui-search.md) [Manage Profiles](admin-users-profiles-roles.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - +[Working with [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]](ui-work-product.md) [!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/business-central/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md b/business-central/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md index 1a6d30dab..deaa41283 100644 --- a/business-central/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md +++ b/business-central/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ This selection of walkthroughs provides step-by-step, end-to-end business proces The walkthroughs are complete scenarios, and should be performed from beginning to end for the greatest benefit. Many are based on [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] demonstrations, and enable you to try those procedures yourself, at your own pace. > [!NOTE] -> Some of the walkthroughs require sample data that is not available in the default demonstration company in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. +> Some of the walkthroughs require sample data that is not available in the default demonstration company in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. |To|See| |--------|---------| diff --git a/business-central/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md b/business-central/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md index ea94c08ca..b49926e8b 100644 --- a/business-central/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md +++ b/business-central/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- - title: Walkthrough - Calculating Work in Process for a Job | Microsoft Docs + title: Walkthrough - Calculating Work in Process for a Job description: Jobs involve the consumption of employee hours, machine hours, inventory items, and other types of usage that have to be tracked as a job progresses. author: SorenGP @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ With jobs, you can schedule the usage of your company's resources and keep track |Field|Description| |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|****|Leave blank if the job task is a part of a group of tasks.| +|**\**|Leave blank if the job task is a part of a group of tasks.| |**Total**|Defines the range or group of tasks that are included in the WIP and recognition calculation. Within the group, any job task with **Job Task Type** set to **Posting** will be included in the WIP Total, unless its **WIP-Total** field is set to **Excluded**.| |**Excluded**|Applies only to a task with **Job Task Type** of **Posting**. The task is not included when WIP and recognition are calculated.| diff --git a/business-central/work-outlook-addin.md b/business-central/work-outlook-addin.md new file mode 100644 index 000000000..52ef0d2ad --- /dev/null +++ b/business-central/work-outlook-addin.md @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +--- +title: Using Business Central with Outlook| Microsoft Docs +description: This service has deep integration with Microsoft 365 enabling you to manage all your business interactions and mail with customers and vendors directly in Outlook. +author: jswymer +ms.service: dynamics365-business-central +ms.topic: conceptual +ms.devlang: na +ms.tgt_pltfrm: na +ms.workload: na +ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365 +ms.date: 08/13/2021 +ms.author: jswymer + +--- +# Using Business Central as your Business Inbox in Outlook + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] offers an add-in that lets you manage business interactions with your customers and vendors, directly in Microsoft Outlook. With the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in for Outlook, you can see financial data related to customers and vendors, and create and send financial documents, such as quotes and invoices. + +[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in consists of two separate add-ins that provide the following capabilities: + +- Contact insights + + This add-in lets you look up [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] customer or vendor information in Outlook emails and calendar appointments. It also lets you create and send [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] business documents, such a sales quote or invoice to a contact. + +- Document view + + When a business document is sent in an email, the add-in provides a direct link from email to the actual business document in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +## Get started + +1. The first thing to do is get the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in installed in Outlook. Your administrator may have already installed the add-in for you. So if you're not sure, check with your administrator or see the next step to verify whether it's installed. + + If the add-in hasn't been installed for you, see [Install the add-in for your own use](admin-outlook.md#install). + +2. With the add-in installed, you can access the **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** add-in from any new or existing email message or calendar appointment in Outlook. + + Start by signing in to Outlook and opening an email message. Then, if you're using the Outlook app, go to the ribbon, and look for **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]**. Or if you're using Outlook on the web, at the top or bottom of the email message, look for ![Business Central add-in icon in Outlook.](media/outlook-business-central-icon.png) or go to the more actions ![Show more actions for an email in Outlook.](media/outlook-more-actions-button.png) button. + + ![Access Business Central add-ins in Outlook.](media/outlook-business-central-addin.png) + + If you've installed the add-in on your own and chose to get a sample email, check your inbox for the welcome email. This email provides information to help you get started. + +The first time you use the add-in, in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in pane, you might be asked to sign in. In this case, choose **Sign in now** and follow the instructions onscreen to sign in to Business Central using your account. + +> [!TIP] +> If you use the new Outlook on the web, you can pin **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** so that it is always immediately visible, instead of having to go to the more actions button, making it convenient to view contact insights while you browse through different emails. + +For more information, see [Using add-ins in Outlook on the web](https://support.office.com/article/using-add-ins-in-outlook-on-the-web-8f2ce816-5df4-44a5-958c-f7f9d6dabdce?ns=OLWAO365B&version=16). + +## Work with contacts and documents using the Contact Insights add-in + +Let's say that you get an email from a customer that wants to get a quote on some items. Directly in Outlook, you can open the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in, which recognizes the sender as a customer, and opens the customer card for that company. From this dashboard, you see overview information for the customer, and can drill down for more detail on specific documents. You can also dig into the sales history for the customer. If it's a new contact, you can create them as a new customer in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] without leaving Outlook. + +In the add-in, you can create a sales quote and send it back to this customer without leaving Outlook. All of the information that you need to send the sales quote is available in your business inbox in Outlook. Once you have the data entered, you post the quote and send it by email. [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] generates a .PDF file with the sales quote and attaches it to the email message that you draft in the add-in. + +Similarly, if you get an email from a vendor, you can use the add-in to work with vendors and purchase invoices. + +Sometimes you want to see more fields than you can see in the add-in, such as when you want to fill in lines in an invoice. To give you a bit more space to work with, you can pop out the add-in to a separate page. It's still part of Outlook, but you have more space. As you enter data for the document in the pop-out view, the changes are automatically saved. +The following sections lead you through some basic tasks to give you a general understanding how to use it. + +> [!TIP] +> The tasks explain how to use the add-in from an email message. But you can do the same from a calendar appointment in Outlook. + +### Look up a business contact when composing an email + +1. Create a new email message. +2. In the ribbon, go to **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** and choose **Contact Insights**. Or if you're using Outlook on the web, go to the bottom of the message, choose ![Business Central add-in icon in Outlook.](media/outlook-business-central-icon.png) > **Contact Insights**. +3. In the **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** add-in pane that opens, scan for and choose the contact you want. + + An overview of the contact displays in the pane and the contact is added in the **To** line of the email. + +### View and change the contact details or switch company + +The action bar at the top of the [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] add-in pane includes several actions that let your dig deeper into details about the contact and change things. + +![Business Central add-in action bar in Outlook.](media/outlook-addin-action-bar.png) + +For example, you can open the full contact details as you would see them in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. If you work with more that one [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] company, you can easily switch between companies. + +### Track incoming documents + +Perhaps you use the **Incoming Documents** list in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] to track documents for processing that vendors send to you, such as a purchase invoice that needs to be paid. If you do, you can easily create Incoming Documents records from the Outlook add-in and include the email attachments. + +1. When you receive an email from a vendor that has an attachment, choose ![Business Central add-in icon in Outlook.](media/outlook-business-central-icon.png) **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** > **Contact Insights**. + +2. In the action bar of the add-in, choose **Show more actions**, then choose the **Send to Incoming Documents…**. + +### Create and send new document to a contact + +1. In the ribbon or at the bottom of the email message, choose ![Business Central add-in icon in Outlook.](media/outlook-business-central-icon.png) **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** > **New**, then choose the type of document you want to create, such as **Sales Quote**. +2. Make changes to the document in the **[!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]** add-in pane. +3. When the document is ready to send to the contact, in the action bar, choose **Show more actions**, then choose the **Send by Email** action. + +## View a document from an email using the Document View add-in + +Whether it's an email you sent or received, you can surface any [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)] document, like the sales quote, directly in Outlook. From there, you can make changes and navigate to related information—just as you would from within [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. + +If you're using the Outlook app, just choose **Document Link** at the top of the email message. For Outlook on the web, look for the document reference link in the email message. The reference link text will include the document number, which is based on the number series used in [!INCLUDE[prod_short](includes/prod_short.md)]. For example, the link for a sales quote would be something like **Sales Quote S-QUO1000**. + +## See Related Training at [Microsoft Learn](/learn/modules/alternative-interfaces-dynamics-365-business-central/index) + +## See Also + +[Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) +[Getting Business Central on my Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) +[Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) +[Finance](finance.md) +[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) +[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) +[Minimum Requirements for Outlook](product-requirements.md#outlook) +[Using add-ins in Outlook on the web](https://support.office.com/article/Using-Add-ins-in-Outlook-on-the-web-8f2ce816-5df4-44a5-958c-f7f9d6dabdce?appver=OWB150) + + +[!INCLUDE[footer-include](includes/footer-banner.md)] \ No newline at end of file